FIRE BRIDGE

FIRE BRIDGE
FIRE BRIDGE
VERSION 5.8
SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
ImageTrend, Inc.
20855 Kensington Blvd.
Lakeville, MN 55044
Tel: (952) 469-1589
Toll Free: (888) 469-7789
Fax: (952) 985-5671
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |2
Copyright
Fire Bridge Version 5.8
Copyright © 2013 ImageTrend, Inc. All rights reserved.
Fire Bridge
Viewer contains copyrighted materials licensed from various copyright owners.
Fire Bridge
Viewer contains copyrighted materials, which are licensed to you, the end user, for your personal use
subject to the terms of the enclosed end user license agreement. You must treat this software and its
contents like any other copyrighted material, such as a Portfolio or musical recording. Any other use,
duplication, or distribution of this product or its contents may violate applicable U.S. or international
copyright laws, and may subject you to prosecution under penalty of law.
Fire Bridge logo is a trademark of ImageTrend, Inc.
NOTICE Unless otherwise provided by written agreement with ImageTrend, Inc., this publication, and the
software sold with this publication, are provided “as is” without warranty of any kind either expressed or
implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. The entire risk arising out of the user or performance of this publication and software remains
with you. In no event will ImageTrend, Inc., or any of its suppliers, be liable for any lost profits, lost
savings, direct, incidental or indirect damages or other economic or consequential damages, even if
ImageTrend, Inc. or its suppliers have been advised of the possibility of such damages. ImageTrend, Inc.
reserves the right to modify this document at any time without obligation to notify anyone.
International Code Council Copyright
This software contains information which is proprietary to and copyrighted by or licensed to International
Code Council, Inc. The portions of information copyrighted by or licensed to the International Code
Council, Inc., have been obtained and reproduced with permission. The acronym ICC®, the ICC logo,
IFC, are federally protected trademarks and service marks of ICC. All other code titles are the trademarks
and services marks of the International Code Council, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Without advance
written permission from the International Code Council, Inc., no part of the International Code Council,
Inc.’s copyrighted or licensed material may be reproduced, distributed or transmitted in any form of by any
means, including, without limitation, electronic, optical or mechanical means (by way of example and not
limitation, photocopying, printing, or recording by or in an information storage retrieval system).
For information on permission to copy the International Code Council, Inc. materials, please contact:
Publications, 4051 West Flossmoor Road, Country Club Hills, IL 60478. Phone 1-888-ICC-SAFE (4227233).
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |3
Table of Contents
COPYRIGHT ................................................................................................................................................. 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................... 3
Introduction to Fire Bridge ......................................................................................... 12
1.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 13
1.2 OVERVIEW OF THE FIRE BRIDGE APPLICATION....................................................................................... 13
1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................... 13
Web/Application Server Hardware ....................................................................................................... 13
Operating Systems Supported ............................................................................................................. 13
Web Server Software ........................................................................................................................... 13
Additional Service Software ................................................................................................................. 13
Additional Application Software ........................................................................................................... 14
Database Server Hardware ................................................................................................................. 14
Database Software .............................................................................................................................. 14
Internet Browser Requirements for End Users .................................................................................... 14
1.4 FIRE BRIDGE ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................. 15
1.5 NAVIGATING THE SETUP PAGE .............................................................................................................. 17
1.6 ADMINISTRATION AND PERMISSIONS ..................................................................................................... 17
1.7 RECORD KEEPING ................................................................................................................................ 18
1.8 LOGIN.................................................................................................................................................. 18
Forgetting Your Password or Username ............................................................................................. 20
1.9 PERSONALIZING THE DASHBOARD ......................................................................................................... 20
Posting a Message for your Service on the Dashboard ...................................................................... 23
1.10 ACCESSING HELP............................................................................................................................... 24
Service Information and Setup .................................................................................. 29
2.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 30
2.2 SETTING UP AUTOMATIC CALL NUMBERS .............................................................................................. 30
2.3 ENABLING AND DISABLING EXPORTS ..................................................................................................... 31
2.4 SETTING UP CALL HOUR ADMINISTRATION ............................................................................................ 31
2.5 W ORKING WITH LEAVE OF ABSENCE REASONS ...................................................................................... 32
2.6 SETTING A DEFAULT DATE RANGE FOR RUN HISTORY SEARCHES .......................................................... 32
2.7 SETTING UP RUN LOCKING ................................................................................................................... 33
2.8 SETTING UP CATEGORIES FOR DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................... 33
Adding a New Document Category ..................................................................................................... 33
Editing an Existing Document Category .............................................................................................. 34
2.9 MANAGING CONTACTS ......................................................................................................................... 36
Adding a Contact ................................................................................................................................. 37
Editing a Contact Record ..................................................................................................................... 38
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |4
2.10 SETTING UP THE LOCATION MAP ........................................................................................................ 38
2.11 W ORKING WITH LOCATION/OCCUPANT/CONTACT GROUPS................................................................... 39
Adding a Group .................................................................................................................................... 39
Editing a Group .................................................................................................................................... 40
2.12 W ORKING WITH LOCATION, OCCUPANCY AND INSPECTION QUESTIONS ................................................. 41
Adding a Question ............................................................................................................................... 41
Editing a Question................................................................................................................................ 42
2.13 MERGING OCCUPANTS ....................................................................................................................... 43
2.14 W ORKING WITH CUSTOM QUESTIONS.................................................................................................. 44
Organizing Custom Questions on Run Forms ..................................................................................... 44
Viewing and Editing Special Study Questions ..................................................................................... 45
Adding a New Special Study Question ................................................................................................ 46
2.15 VIEWING AND EDITING BASIC SERVICE INFORMATION........................................................................... 47
2.16 W ORKING WITH STATIONS .................................................................................................................. 48
Viewing and Editing Station Information .............................................................................................. 48
Adding a New Station .......................................................................................................................... 49
Setting a Default Station ...................................................................................................................... 50
2.17 W ORKING WITH VEHICLE INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 51
Viewing and Editing Vehicle Information ............................................................................................. 51
Viewing and Entering Vehicle Mileage ................................................................................................ 52
Adding a New Vehicle .......................................................................................................................... 52
2.18 W ORKING WITH ZONES OR DISTRICTS ................................................................................................. 54
Adding a Zone or District Record ......................................................................................................... 54
Editing a Zone or District Record ......................................................................................................... 55
2.19 W ORKING WITH ALARMS ..................................................................................................................... 55
Adding a New Alarm ............................................................................................................................ 55
Editing an Existing Alarm ..................................................................................................................... 56
2.20 W ORKING WITH CENSUS TRACTS........................................................................................................ 57
2.21 SETTING UP OPTIONAL MODULES ON FIRE RUN FORMS ...................................................................... 58
2.22 MANAGING STREET AND HIGHWAY NAMES .......................................................................................... 59
Adding a Street Name.......................................................................................................................... 59
Turning on the Address Lookup Feature ............................................................................................. 60
2.23 SETTING NFIRS FIELD DEFAULTS ...................................................................................................... 61
2.24 W ORKING WITH PAY RATES ................................................................................................................ 61
Adding a Pay Rate ............................................................................................................................... 61
Editing a Pay Rate ............................................................................................................................... 62
2.25 W ORKING WITH SHIFTS AND PLATOONS .............................................................................................. 63
Adding a Shift or Platoon ..................................................................................................................... 63
Editing a Shift or Platoon Record ......................................................................................................... 64
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |5
2.26 W ORKING WITH CONTRACT RESPONSE DEPARTMENTS ........................................................................ 64
2.27 W ORKING WITH MUTUAL AID DEPARTMENTS ....................................................................................... 65
2.28 W ORKING WITH INSPECTIONS SETUP .................................................................................................. 66
Setting Up Auto Inspection Numbers ................................................................................................... 66
Working with Inspection Types ............................................................................................................ 67
Working with Inspection Violation Codes............................................................................................. 69
Adding Inspection Violation Codes .................................................................................................. 69
Editing Inspection Violation Codes ................................................................................................... 70
Working with Inspection Violation Letters ............................................................................................ 70
Downloading fyiReporting Designer ................................................................................................. 71
Downloading a Template to Work With ............................................................................................ 72
Uploading a Finished Template ....................................................................................................... 72
Configuring Fire Inspections Client Settings ........................................................................................ 73
2.29 DOCUMENTING TIMES WITH NO FIRE CALLS TO REPORT ...................................................................... 74
Documenting No Fire Calls .................................................................................................................. 74
Documenting Non-Fire Related Calls .................................................................................................. 75
Working with Training and Activities Information .................................................... 76
3.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 77
3.2 W ORKING WITH TRAINING AND ACTIVITY CATEGORIES ........................................................................... 77
Viewing and Editing Categories ........................................................................................................... 77
Adding Categories ............................................................................................................................... 79
Setting Access to Categories ............................................................................................................... 80
3.3 W ORKING WITH TEMPLATES ................................................................................................................. 82
Adding New Templates ........................................................................................................................ 82
Viewing and Editing Templates ........................................................................................................... 86
3.4 SETTING UP TRAINING/ACTIVITY TOPICS ............................................................................................... 88
Creating a New Topic .......................................................................................................................... 88
Editing a Training/Activity Topic ........................................................................................................... 89
3.5 SETTING TRAINING AND ACTIVITY TIME CALCULATIONS .......................................................................... 89
3.6 W ORKING WITH TRAINING RECORDS ..................................................................................................... 90
Viewing and Editing Training Records ................................................................................................. 90
Adding Training Records ..................................................................................................................... 92
3.7 W ORKING WITH ACTIVITIES RECORDS ................................................................................................... 97
Viewing and Editing Activity Records .................................................................................................. 97
Adding Activities Records .................................................................................................................. 100
Working with Staff Information ................................................................................ 104
4.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 105
4.2 STAFF PROFILE INFORMATION ............................................................................................................ 105
The Demographics Tab ..................................................................................................................... 106
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |6
Signing Up for ImageTrend Email Notifications ............................................................................. 106
The Employment Tab......................................................................................................................... 107
The Certifications Tab ........................................................................................................................ 108
The Permissions Tab ......................................................................................................................... 109
The Emergency Contacts Tab ........................................................................................................... 112
The Equipment Tab ........................................................................................................................... 113
The Training Tab................................................................................................................................ 114
The Documents Tab .......................................................................................................................... 115
4.3 VIEWING AND EDITING STAFF PROFILE INFORMATION .......................................................................... 115
Viewing and Editing Basic Profile Information ................................................................................... 115
4.4 ADDING STAFF PROFILES ................................................................................................................... 116
4.5 W ORKING W ITH SHIFT SETUP............................................................................................................. 117
Viewing and Editing Shift Setup ......................................................................................................... 117
Adding New Shifts .............................................................................................................................. 118
Working with Incident Information .......................................................................... 120
5.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 121
5.2 COMPLETING RUN REPORTS .............................................................................................................. 121
Run Form Tabs .................................................................................................................................. 123
Run Form Tools ................................................................................................................................. 124
Understanding Validity ....................................................................................................................... 124
5.3 ADDITIONAL RUN FORM OPTIONS ....................................................................................................... 125
Adding Exposures to a Run Report ................................................................................................... 125
Adding QA/QI Notes to a Run Report ................................................................................................ 126
Adding Addendums............................................................................................................................ 128
Adding Attachments ........................................................................................................................... 129
Adding a Hazmat Operations and Billing Packet ............................................................................... 129
5.4 VIEWING AND EDITING PAST RUN REPORTS ........................................................................................ 130
Working with the Incident List ............................................................................................................ 130
Overview of Incident List Options ................................................................................................... 130
Searching for Incidents from the Incident List ................................................................................ 131
Setting the Refresh Frequency ...................................................................................................... 134
Creating a View .............................................................................................................................. 135
Keyboard Shortcuts for the Incident List ........................................................................................ 139
Working with Run History................................................................................................................... 139
Editing the Run History Display Options ........................................................................................ 141
Working with Run History Results .................................................................................................. 142
5.5 UPDATING MULTIPLE RUNS ................................................................................................................ 142
Printing Multiple Runs ........................................................................................................................ 142
Updating the Status of Multiple Runs ................................................................................................ 143
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |7
Locking and Unlocking Multiple Runs ................................................................................................ 143
5.6 ACCESSING PRE-CREATED SERVICE REPORTS ................................................................................... 143
Communicating with the Fire Bridge ....................................................................... 145
6.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 146
6.2 VIEWING MESSAGES IN THE INBOX ...................................................................................................... 146
6.3 REPLYING TO MESSAGES IN THE INBOX ............................................................................................... 147
6.4 SENDING NEW MESSAGES.................................................................................................................. 148
6.5 FLAGGING MESSAGES FOR FOLLOW UP .............................................................................................. 150
6.6 DELETING MESSAGES ........................................................................................................................ 151
6.7 SUBMITTING FEEDBACK TO IMAGETREND ............................................................................................ 151
Guidelines .......................................................................................................................................... 151
Submitting a New Idea ....................................................................................................................... 152
Voting for an Idea............................................................................................................................... 154
Removing Votes for an Idea ........................................................................................................... 155
Commenting on an Idea .................................................................................................................... 156
6.8 VIEWING DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 157
6.9 EDITING DOCUMENT INFORMATION ..................................................................................................... 158
6.10 ADDING NEW DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................... 158
6.11 DELETING DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................................... 159
Working with Locations and Occupants ................................................................. 160
7.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 161
7.2 OVERVIEW OF LOCATION, ORGANIZATION AND OCCUPANT PROFILES ................................................... 161
7.3 VIEWING LOCATION INFORMATION....................................................................................................... 161
7.4 ADDING LOCATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 163
7.5 EDITING LOCATION PROFILES ............................................................................................................. 164
Editing Basic Location Information .................................................................................................... 165
Editing Building Information ............................................................................................................... 165
Adding Location Contacts .................................................................................................................. 166
Editing Location Contacts .................................................................................................................. 168
Updating Contact Order ..................................................................................................................... 169
7.6 ADDING OCCUPANTS .......................................................................................................................... 169
7.7 EDITING OCCUPANT PROFILES ........................................................................................................... 171
Components of an Occupant Record ................................................................................................ 172
Editing Basic Occupant Profile Information ....................................................................................... 172
Adding Occupant Contacts ................................................................................................................ 173
Editing Occupant Contacts ................................................................................................................ 176
Adding Inspections............................................................................................................................. 176
Editing Inspections ............................................................................................................................. 177
Editing Maintenance Information ....................................................................................................... 177
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |8
Adding Occupant Task Records ........................................................................................................ 178
7.8 SUMMARY OF PRE-PLAN INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 178
7.9 W ORKING WITH PLANS AND BUILDING INFORMATION ............................................................................ 179
Generating a Pre-Plan Report ........................................................................................................... 179
Editing Overview Information ............................................................................................................. 180
Working with Building Information Categories ................................................................................... 181
Adding Building Information Records ................................................................................................ 183
7.10 W ORKING WITH ON-SITE MATERIALS ................................................................................................ 183
7.11 MAPPING A LOCATION ...................................................................................................................... 184
7.12 W ORKING WITH HYDRANT RECORDS ................................................................................................. 185
Adding a Hydrant Record to a Location ............................................................................................. 186
Viewing and Editing Existing Hydrant Records ................................................................................. 187
7.13 W ORKING WITH HAZMAT RECORDS .................................................................................................. 189
Viewing and Editing HazMat Records ............................................................................................... 189
Creating New HazMat Records ......................................................................................................... 190
7.14 W ORKING WITH SPRINKLERS ............................................................................................................ 191
Adding Sprinkler Records .................................................................................................................. 191
7.15 W ORKING WITH LOCATION DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 193
Viewing Documents ........................................................................................................................... 193
Editing Document Information ........................................................................................................... 193
Adding New Documents .................................................................................................................... 194
Deleting Documents........................................................................................................................... 195
7.16 MANAGING ORGANIZATIONS ............................................................................................................. 195
Managing Inspections............................................................................................... 197
8.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 198
Inspection Code Copyright Information ............................................................................................. 198
8.2 OVERVIEW OF INSPECTIONS ............................................................................................................... 198
8.3 VIEWING INSPECTIONS ....................................................................................................................... 198
Viewing Inspections: From the Inspections Page .............................................................................. 198
Viewing Inspections: From the Occupant Profile ............................................................................... 199
8.4 COMPLETING INSPECTION RECORDS ................................................................................................... 200
Adding an Inspection Basic Form from the Inspections Page ........................................................... 200
Adding an Inspection from the Occupant Profile ............................................................................... 201
Completing Supplemental Forms ...................................................................................................... 203
The Occupancy Record ..................................................................................................................... 204
Reporting Violations ........................................................................................................................... 204
Updating Violation Records ............................................................................................................... 205
Attaching Additional Documents ........................................................................................................ 206
Working with Inventory............................................................................................. 208
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e |9
9.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................... 209
9.2 INTRODUCTION TO IMAGETREND’S INVENTORY MODULE....................................................................... 209
9.3 CONFIGURING YOUR DASHBOARD ....................................................................................................... 209
9.4 OVERVIEW OF PRODUCT CATEGORIES, PRODUCTS AND ITEMS............................................................. 209
9.5 OVERVIEW OF SITES .......................................................................................................................... 210
9.6 VIEWING SITES .................................................................................................................................. 211
9.7 ADDING A SITE ................................................................................................................................... 213
9.8 ADDING A PRODUCT TO A SITE............................................................................................................ 215
9.9 ADDING A SITE W ITHIN A SITE............................................................................................................. 217
9.10 ADDING A DOCUMENT TO A SITE ....................................................................................................... 219
9.11 OVERVIEW OF A PRODUCT................................................................................................................ 220
9.12 VIEWING A PRODUCT RECORD .......................................................................................................... 221
Locating a Product Record with a Barcode Scanner ......................................................................... 223
9.13 ADDING A PRODUCT TO THE SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 224
Adding a Product through a Barcode................................................................................................. 226
Adding Photos to a Product ............................................................................................................... 226
9.14 EDITING A PRODUCT RECORD .......................................................................................................... 229
9.15 ADDING A DOCUMENT TO A PRODUCT ............................................................................................... 231
9.16 OVERVIEW OF AN ITEM ..................................................................................................................... 233
Viewing Item Statistics ....................................................................................................................... 234
9.17 ADDING AN ITEM TO THE SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 235
Adding an Item from a Product Record ............................................................................................. 235
Adding an Item from the Items Page ................................................................................................. 237
9.18 COPYING AN ITEM ............................................................................................................................ 239
9.19 EDITING ITEM INFORMATION ............................................................................................................. 239
9.20 VIEWING AN ITEM’S RECORD............................................................................................................. 240
Locating Items with a Barcode Scanner ............................................................................................ 241
9.21 ADDING A DOCUMENT TO AN ITEM ..................................................................................................... 242
9.22 ALLOCATING AN ITEM ....................................................................................................................... 243
Marking an Allocated Item as Returned............................................................................................. 246
9.23 VIEWING REPAIR INFORMATION FOR AN ITEM ..................................................................................... 247
9.24 VIEWING THE TRANSACTION LOG FOR AN ITEM .................................................................................. 248
9.25 VIEWING USAGE OF AN ITEM ............................................................................................................. 249
9.26 ADDING A USAGE RECORD FOR AN ITEM ........................................................................................... 249
9.27 W ORKING WITH MULTIPLE ITEMS ...................................................................................................... 250
Deleting Multiple Items....................................................................................................................... 250
Moving Multiple Items ........................................................................................................................ 251
Allocating Multiple Items .................................................................................................................... 252
Updating Item Information for Multiple Items ..................................................................................... 254
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 10
Updating Item Details for Multiple Items ............................................................................................ 256
Adding Maintenance Records for Multiple Items ............................................................................... 256
9.28 OVERVIEW OF MAINTENANCE RECORDS............................................................................................ 258
9.29 VIEWING A MAINTENANCE RECORD ................................................................................................... 258
9.30 ADDING A MAINTENANCE RECORD .................................................................................................... 259
Adding a Maintenance Record from the Item Profile ......................................................................... 259
Adding a Maintenance Record from the Maintenance Tab ............................................................... 261
Documenting Maintenance Specifications ......................................................................................... 264
Recording Repairs for a Maintenance Record .................................................................................. 265
Adding a Document for a Maintenance Record ................................................................................. 268
9.31 ADDING A REPAIR FOR AN ITEM......................................................................................................... 269
9.32 SETTING UP PRODUCT CATEGORIES................................................................................................. 273
9.33 ADDING A MANUFACTURER ............................................................................................................... 275
9.34 ADDING A PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE ....................................................................................................... 277
9.35 ADDING A VENDOR ........................................................................................................................... 278
9.36 ADDING REPAIR STATUSES .............................................................................................................. 280
9.37 ADDING A MAINTENANCE STATUS ..................................................................................................... 281
9.38 ADDING A MAINTENANCE CATEGORY ................................................................................................ 282
9.39 ADDING SPECIAL DATA CATEGORIES ................................................................................................ 283
9.40 ADDING CUSTOM QUESTIONS ........................................................................................................... 285
9.41 ADDING DOCUMENT TYPES .............................................................................................................. 286
9.42 ADDING FUNDING SOURCES ............................................................................................................. 288
Working With Checklists .......................................................................................... 289
10.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 290
10.2 VIEWING CHECKLISTS ...................................................................................................................... 290
10.3 SETTING UP ITEMS FOR CHECKLISTS ................................................................................................ 292
10.4 SETTING UP CATEGORIES FOR CHECKLISTS ...................................................................................... 293
Adding a New Category ..................................................................................................................... 293
Adding Category Members ................................................................................................................ 294
10.5 SETTING UP A NEW CHECKLIST ........................................................................................................ 295
10.6 UPDATING A CHECKLIST ................................................................................................................... 301
Adding an Instance ............................................................................................................................ 301
Updating the Items on a Checklist ..................................................................................................... 305
10.7 FILLING OUT A CHECKLIST ................................................................................................................ 307
Importing and Exporting Data .................................................................................. 312
11.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 313
11.2 INTRODUCTION TO DATA EXCHANGE ................................................................................................. 313
11.3 RUNNING A NFIRS EXPORT ............................................................................................................. 314
Working with Report Writer ...................................................................................... 318
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 11
12.1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 319
12.2 SUMMARY OF REPORT W RITER ........................................................................................................ 319
12.3 TYPES OF REPORTS ......................................................................................................................... 319
12.4 REQUESTING STANDARD REPORTS AND CHARTS............................................................................... 319
12.5 ADDITIONAL STANDARD REPORT OPTIONS ........................................................................................ 321
Adding Favorite Reports .................................................................................................................... 321
Printing Reports ................................................................................................................................. 322
12.6 W ORKING WITH TRANSACTIONAL REPORTS ....................................................................................... 322
Step One: Selecting a Category ........................................................................................................ 324
Step Two: Selecting Columns ............................................................................................................ 324
Changing the Column View (Optional) ........................................................................................... 325
Step Three: Setting Display Options (Optional) ................................................................................. 326
Step Four: Setting Grouping Rules (Optional) ................................................................................... 327
Step Five: Setting Sorting Rules (Optional) ....................................................................................... 328
Step Six: Setting Criteria and Filters (Optional) ................................................................................. 329
Step Seven: Changing the Appearance of the Report (Optional) ..................................................... 331
Step Eight: Viewing the Report .......................................................................................................... 332
Step Nine: Saving the Report (Optional) ........................................................................................... 332
Step Ten: Deleting the Report (Optional) .......................................................................................... 334
Step Eleven: Assigning Permissions (Optional) ................................................................................ 334
Step Twelve: Scheduling Reports (Optional) ..................................................................................... 334
Step Thirteen: Exporting and Printing Reports (Optional) ................................................................. 336
Glossary ..................................................................................................................... 337
GLOSSARY .............................................................................................................................................. 338
Help and Support ...................................................................................................... 355
HELP AND SUPPORT................................................................................................................................. 356
Before Contacting ImageTrend .......................................................................................................... 356
Contacting ImageTrend ..................................................................................................................... 356
Technical Support .............................................................................................................................. 356
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 12
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION TO FIRE BRIDGE
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 13
1.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter will cover basic information about the purpose, structure and technical requirements of the
Fire Bridge and the roles of individuals given administrative capabilities for the application.
1.2 Overview of the Fire Bridge Application
The ImageTrend Fire Bridge is a Web-based system dedicated to the collection, analysis and reporting of
data associated with fire incidents. The Fire Bridge allows system users to satisfy reporting requirements
easily. Online NFIRS forms allow users to enter incident data once and use the data for NFIRS reports,
service reports and reviews of past incidents. Information in the system can be automatically entered into
NFIRS forms, minimizing the amount of time needed to complete a form. Some of this information can be
entered into the system before an incident happens, while other information is copied from form to form to
prevent entering data multiple times for different forms relating to the same incident.
The Fire Bridge acts as a data storage area, collecting information from incident reports and other data
entry by users and administrators. Users can access this information for reference, to create reports for
performance analysis, or to manage inspections, staff certifications, location information, and
communication. The system is NFIRS-compliant, automatically collecting all information required by the
national database.
The Fire Bridge system has the capability to be expanded to a system that collects EMS data in addition
to fire data; for this reason, you may see sections throughout the system that pertain specifically to EMS
data collection and will not make any changes to the system as it currently is. These sections will be
noted in this manual, and you will not need to work with those sections.
1.3 System Requirements
Web/Application Server Hardware
Recommended
Dual Quad Core Processors
8-16 GB RAM
100 GB Available Hard Disk Space
RAID 5 SCSI Hard Drives with OS
and Data Partitions
ImageTrend Hosted
Dual Quad Core Processors
32 GB RAM
SAN Data Storage
Blade Servers with Microsoft
Hyper-V
Operating Systems Supported
(not required if hosted by ImageTrend)
Microsoft Windows 2003 R2 Server
Microsoft Windows 2008 R2 Server (recommended)
Web Server Software
(not required if hosted by ImageTrend)
Microsoft IIS version 6.0, 7.5 or later
Additional Service Software
(not required if hosted by ImageTrend)
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1
Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 14
Microsoft Tablet PC SDK
Additional Application Software
(not required if hosted by ImageTrend)
Adobe ColdFusion 9 Enterprise
Database Server Hardware
A separate database server is required (unless hosted by ImageTrend)
Required
Recommended
2 GHz Processor
Dual Quad Core Processors
4 GB RAM
8–16 GB RAM
40 GB Available Hard Disk Space
80 GB Available Hard Disk Space
RAID 5 SCSI Hard Drives
Database Software
64-bit software is recommended.
Microsoft SQL Server 2005
Microsoft SQL Server 2008
Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 (recommended)
Internet Browser Requirements for End Users
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 and above
Other browsers that support Mozilla 4.0 and above
Adobe Flash 8 or higher (recommended)
Adobe Reader 8 or higher (recommended)
Silverlight 4
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 15
1.4 Fire Bridge Environment
The Fire Bridge allows system users to view a variety of information about the fire service and enter
information for new run reports. Upon logging in, users will see several tools for navigation in the header
at the top of the page.
The links in the top left will bring you between modules and will display the same options no matter what
the user is doing with the Fire Bridge. Additional links may be available depending on which modules you
have access to. If you have access to many different modules, some of them may be included under the
More link. Additional options in the top right allow you to edit your profile, search for run reports or
services, access your inbox and log out.










7/19/2013
My Fire Department or Fire Departments provides access to service specific functions for service
administration, individual run (incident) reporting and standard reports.
Data Exchange allows administrators to import new information to the system from particular
formats or export data gathered in the system to a supported format.
Report Writer 2.0 provides access to the new Report Writer for working with standard, search, ad
hoc and multi-dimensional reporting.
User Voice provides access to a forum where you can leave and vote for suggestions for the Fire
Bridge and associated modules.
Help provides access to ImageTrend University, where you will find educational videos and
downloadable text guides to help you use the Fire Bridge.
The username in the top right opens the currently logged-in user’s profile.
The number icon in the top right opens your inbox. This number changes based on the number of
unread inbox messages you have.
The Search icon in the top right allows you to search for run reports based on run number.
The Maximize/Minimize icon in the top right allows you to toggle between collapsing the top area
of the page (which contains the tabs) to show more of the page content or showing it again.
Logout will log the user out of the application.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 16
The tabs allow you to access pages and sections within the module you have selected from the links at
the top of the page. These tabs will change depending on the module you are working within. You can
hover over any tab displaying an arrow to view a list of sections you can open.
Many users will work primarily with the tabs available in the My Fire Department (or Fire Departments)
section.





Dashboard brings you to your Dashboard for this service.
Incidents opens a drop down menu that allows you to jump to the page to add a new incident or
search run history.
Modules opens a drop down menu that allows you to open any of the sections available for your
service, such as the Locations, Occupants, Inventory or Training modules. The modules available
here may differ from those shown in this manual based on your level of access to the system and
the modules that your service uses.
Staff brings you to the Staff page for this service, with a list of all staff members. This option may
not be available to you, depending on your level of access to the system.
Setup brings you to the setup options for your service on the system. You may not be able to
access or make any changes within this section, based on your level of access to the system.
To return to the home page for this service at any time, from the top toolbar, click My Fire Department or,
if available, the Dashboard tab.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 17
1.5 Navigating the Setup Page
The Setup tab is where you make most of the changes to your service. All of the settings are broken up
into categories and nested in lists. You can access most of the configuration and setup options for your
service and its resources through the Setup tab.
You can access the options under the Setup tab at any time by clicking the Setup tab within the My Fire
Department section.
You can use the Search text box above the categories to find the setting you need, or you can click on a
category name to reveal a sub menu underneath. Clicking on one of these sub-menu items will reveal the
particular settings grouped there.
NOTE: When you are in a configuration page for a certain item, all other configuration pages can be
accessed from the left menu.
1.6 Administration and Permissions
Access to the Fire Bridge system is controlled by permissions, which determine how much access people
have to each section of the system. Service administrators generally have the ability to change the setup
of the Fire Bridge for their own service, allowing the application to be configured to fit each service’s
needs. Each service may have customized administrative roles, so not all administrators may be able to
complete all functions or even see all features detailed in the manual. While this manual provides
instruction for the most common permissions for fire service administrators, you service may have
different requirements and needs that cannot be addressed here.
If you see a section within the manual detailing information that you cannot see but would like to be able
to access, please talk with your state administrator; this is most likely a section that is restricted by
permissions. If you find a section that allows you to do more than is covered in this Service Administrator
Guide, please refer to the System Administrator Guide for information about tasks for higher permission
levels.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 18
1.7 Record Keeping
Most information that has been added to the Fire Bridge system can also be deleted from the system.
However, deleting information is strongly discouraged, as deleted profiles or records can cause
previously finished records to become incomplete. Once a record or profile is deleted from the system, all
other records or reports containing information from the deleted profile will also lose the deleted
information. For instance, if a staff member’s profile is deleted, all run reports that the staff member has
ever completed will no longer contain that staff member’s information.
All profiles and records that may be used in documentation will allow administrators to make the record
inactive, which allows administrators to keep the record from being used within the system but still keeps
the information within the system and allows records to be complete. This option is recommended in
place of deleting any records.
1.8 Login
Before you can work with the Fire Bridge system in any way or access any information, you need to log in
to the system. The state has assigned you a username and password that will allow you to access the
system. If you do not have a username and password, you should contact your system or state
administrator; only they will have the authority to provide you with login information.
1. In your Web browser, go to the URL provided for the Fire Bridge system.
The ImageTrend Fire Bridge page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 19
2. In the System Login section in the middle of the page, in the Username text box, type the
username you were provided by the state.
3. In the System Login section, in the Password text box, type your password for the system.
HINT: Initially, you should be provided with a password from the state or through your service.
After you have logged in once, the system will require you to change your password.
4. Below the Username and Password fields, click Submit.
The data privacy statement appears.
5. Read the data privacy statement.
NOTE: Agreeing to the terms automatically creates a user history and audit trail of site access
to comply with HIPAA requirements.
6. If you agree, to log in to the system, click Yes.
You are logged and the home page of the Fire Bridge system is displayed.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 20
Forgetting Your Password or Username
If you forget your login information, the system can email you your username and password as
long as your profile has been set up with a current email address. If you do not have a current
email address included in your user profile, you will need to contact your state or service
administrator to receive your login information.
1. In your Web browser, go to the URL provided for the Fire Bridge system.
The ImageTrend Fire Bridge page appears.
2. In the middle of the page, in the System Login section, click the CLICK HERE IF YOUR
FORGOT YOUR PASSWORD link.
The Forget Your Password? window appears.
3. In the E-Mail Address text box, type the email address that is listed in your Fire Bridge
profile.
4. Click Send.
The system will send your login information to the email address you entered.
1.9 Personalizing the Dashboard
The Dashboard is the page that will appear when you first open the Fire Bridge or when you return to the
My Fire Department section. The Dashboard offers a collection of widgets that you can use to arrange
your Dashboard so that you see information that is important to you when you first log in. You can select
which widgets you want to see and move them on the Dashboard, and those settings will be displayed for
you each time you log in.
1. If needed, click the Dashboard tab.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 21
2. To view a list of all widgets that can be displayed, from the My Dashboard bar, click Display
Preferences.
A list of available types of widgets appears.
3. Click the type of widget you want to add.
A list of available widgets appears.
4. From the list that appears, to display one of the widgets on the page, select the corresponding
checkbox.
5. To hide a widget that is currently displayed on the page, deselect the corresponding checkbox.
6. When finished, to hide the list, click Display Preferences again.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 22
7. To save your chances so that the Dashboard appears like this the next time you log in, click
Save.
8. To move elements, hover the mouse directly above the widget’s title until it becomes a four-sided
arrow.
9. Click and drag the element to its new place on the page; all other elements will automatically
move to accommodate the new layout.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 23
10. When finished adding/hiding or moving widgets, click Save.
NOTE: The Save link does not appear until you have made changes to the Dashboard.
Posting a Message for your Service on the Dashboard
Every Dashboard will have widgets available that each Fire Bridge user can arrange and display
according to their personal preferences. These widgets include a Service Notifications and
System Notifications widget. For Fire Bridge users who have service administrator or system
administrator level permissions, this widget will display a link that allows you to create a message
that will be displayed in this widget for everyone in your service or system. This message will not
be displayed to individuals who have chosen to hide the Service Notifications or System
Notifications widgets.
1. Open your Dashboard.
2. Locate the Service Notifications or System Notifications widget, as appropriate.
3. Click the Edit link.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 24
A pop up window appears with a WYSIWYG editor.
4. Enter the notification information into the text box.
NOTE: Users will see the notification as it is displayed in this text box, including
formatting. If you delete information that is included in this text box from previous
notifications, it will no longer be displayed.
5. When finished, click Save.
The notification information is updated and will be displayed on the Service Notifications
widget for everyone in your service or the System Notifications widget for everyone in
your system.
1.10 Accessing Help
Various videos, manuals and help articles are available to you through ImageTrend University. You can
open ImageTrend University at any time from your Fire Bridge to find help content.
1. From the top left, click Help.
ImageTrend University appears in a new window or tab.
HINT: Depending on the number of modules you have access to, you may have to click the
More link to see the Help link.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 25
NOTE: Depending on the page you clicked the Help link from, you may see the home page for
the application you were working with, or an article related to the page you were viewing may
open directly in the viewing window.
2. To view an article listed in the viewing pane, click the name of the article.
3. To browse through the articles available, use the left menu to expand the desired product and
category until you locate an article to view.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 26
HINT: You can expand any category that you so not see articles underneath by clicking its
name. To collapse it, click its name again.
4. To view a specific article, click its name.
The article appears in the main viewing window.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 27
5. To jump to a related article, click the name of the article.
NOTE: Not all articles will have related articles listed.
6. To search for an article by name or keyword,
a. Type the search terms in the Enter keyword(s) text box at the top of the page.
b. Click Search.
A list of articles containing your search terms appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 28
c.
To move between pages of search results, click the Next and Previous links at the bottom
of the viewing pane.
d. When you see an article you want to look at, click the name of the article.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 29
CHAPTER 2
SERVICE INFORMATION AND SETUP
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 30
2.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how administrators can access, change and add information about their service and
its resources in the Fire Bridge. Setting up the service information can make data collection much easier,
and can provide an easy reference for users who need to access data about the service.
2.2 Setting Up Automatic Call Numbers
You can set up a format for automatic call numbers, which will be added to each run form to ensure that
no run form has the same number. Your format for auto call numbers should be different from any other
system submitting to the same database (e.g., if you are submitting to a state system).
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Auto-Call Number.
The Auto Call Number Setup page appears.
HINT: Since the Fire Bridge system does not record EMS runs, you do not need to complete
the EMS Auto Call Number Setup section.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 31
5. To set up automatic call numbers for fire run forms,
a. In the Fire Auto Incident Number Setup section, in the Auto Incident Number section,
select On.
b. From the Date Format drop down menu, select the format for the date information that
will be included in the call number.
c. From the Auto-Number Format drop down menu, select the number of digits that will be
used at the end of the number.
HINT: These numbers will automatically increase by one with each incident report that
is entered.
d. To start the last numbers of the call number over at 0 based on a period of time, from the
Reset Auto Number drop down menu, select how often to reset the number.
e. To manually set the next number that will be automatically generated, in the Next Auto
Number text box, type the next number.
6. If your fire incident numbers will contain letters or special characters, to automatically generate a
valid NFIRS number for those runs, in the Auto NFIRS Number Setup section, select On.
7. When finished setting up automatic number formats, to save the changes, click Submit.
2.3 Enabling and Disabling Exports
If your agency exports information (to a state or to billing software), you may need to enable exports. This
setting allows you to determine whether your service’s information can be exported from the Data
Exchange section of the Rescue Bridge.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Data Exchange Export.
The Data Exchange Export Setup page appears.
5. To enable your service’s information to be exported through the Data Exchange, select On.
OR
To prevent your service’s information from being exported through the Data Exchange, select Off.
6. When finished, click OK.
The changes are saved.
2.4 Setting Up Call Hour Administration
Administrators can set whether this service tracks calls by the exact amount of time spent on a call or
assigns a set amount of time to each call
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 32
4. Under Configuration, select Call Hour.
The Call Hour Administration page appears.
5. Select the desired call hour tracking option.
6. If the second option is selected, in the Minutes text box, type the desired number of minutes that
should be assigned for each call.
7. Click OK.
2.5 Working with Leave of Absence Reasons
Administrators can add reasons for leaves of absence, which can then be used when recording a leave of
absence on a staff member’s profile.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Leave of Absence.
The Leave of Absence Setup page appears.
5. To add a new reason, in the Add New Reason row, type the reason and its desired order in the
list of reasons.
6. Click OK.
7. To remove a reason, select the corresponding Delete checkbox.
8. Click OK.
9. To change a reason’s information, in the text boxes, make the desired changes.
10. Click OK.
2.6 Setting a Default Date Range for Run History Searches
When searching run history, a default date range automatically appears for the search. You can set up
the length of time before the current date that should be automatically entered for searches.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 33
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Run History.
The Run History Incident Date Range Default page appears.
5. From the Run History Incident Date Range Default drop down menu, select the desired time
period before the current date that should be selected as the default date range.
6. Click OK.
2.7 Setting Up Run Locking
You can choose to automatically lock runs for editing a certain number of days after they are created. If
this option is not available, it may be set up by the system administrator in the Administration section.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Configuration, select Run Locking.
The Runs Locking Option page appears.
5. In the Number of Days text box, type the number of days that should pass before a run is locked.
6. Click OK.
2.8 Setting Up Categories for Documents
You can create categories to organize and control access to documents that you add to staff profiles.
After setting up a new category, you can assign which permission groups should be able to access
documents that are assigned to that category.
Adding a New Document Category
You can set up new document categories for your service as needed.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 34
4. Under Configuration, select Document Categories.
The Document Categories page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type the name of the category.
6. In the Permissions scroll list, select all permission groups that should be able to view
documents in this category.
HINT: To select multiple permission groups, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking
each desired permission group.
7. Click Submit.
The document category is saved.
Editing an Existing Document Category
You can make changes to which permission groups can view documents in a category that has
already been created.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Configuration.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 35
4. Under Configuration, select Document Categories.
The Document Categories page appears.
5. Click the Edit button for the category you want to work with.
The category opens.
6. To select another permission group, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each
desired permission group.
7. To remove access for a permission group that current has access to this category, click
the name of that permission group.
The permission group is deselected.
8. When finished, click Submit.
The changes are saved.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 36
2.9 Managing Contacts
Whenever you create a contact record for a location or occupant, that contact record will be available
both from the appropriate location and occupant profile and from the Manage Contacts section.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Contacts.
The Manage Contacts page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 37
Adding a Contact
You can add a new contact in this section without associating that contact with any location or
occupant.
1. From the Manage Contacts page, click Add Contact.
The Add Contact page appears.
2. In the Contact Name section, enter this contact’s name.
3. In the Business Name text box, type the name of the business or organization this
contact is with.
4. In the Street Address, Apt/Suite and/or P.O. Box fields, enter the contact’s address.
5. From the Favorite Location drop down menu, select the appropriate city, county and
state.
OR
a. In the Postal Code text box, type the zip code.
b. Click Update Now.
6. In the E-mail text box, type this contact’s email address.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 38
7. In the Active Status section, select whether this contact should be active and visible to all
users or inactive and only visible to administrators within this section.
8. In the Phone Numbers section, enter all known phone numbers for this contact.
9. In the Miscellaneous Information section, enter all additional information about this
contact.
10. If your agency uses contact groups, in the Contact Groups section, select all groups that
this contact should be included in.
HINT: To select multiple groups, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each
desired group.
11. In the Notes section, type any additional information.
12. Click OK.
The contact is added to the system.
Editing a Contact Record
You can make changes to a contact record from the Manage Contacts page as well as from the
occupant or location that the contact is associated with.
1. From the Manage Contacts page, click the name of the contact to edit.
A summary of the contact’s profile appears.
2. Make any desired changes to the contact’s profile.
3. From the bottom of the page, click OK.
The changes are saved.
2.10 Setting Up the Location Map
You can choose whether location profiles should automatically include a small map of the location.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 39
4. Under the Fire section, select Location Map.
The Location Map Setup page appears.
5. In the Location Map section, select whether the location map should be displayed or not.
6. When finished, click Submit.
The changes are saved.
2.11 Working with Location/Occupant/Contact Groups
Location, occupant and contact groups provide your fire department with an organizational tool to help
you manage locations, occupants or contacts that have something in particular in common. You can
create as many groups as desired and assign records to those groups to help you find records that are
related in some way.
Adding a Group
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Location/Occupant/Contact Groups.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 40
5. Click Add Group.
The Group Setup page appears.
6. In the Group Description text box, type a name for the group.
7. From the Group Type drop down menu, select the type of records this group should
organize.
8. In the Active section, select whether this group should currently be active and available
for use.
9. When finished, click OK.
The group is created.
Editing a Group
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Location/Occupant/Contact Groups.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 41
5. For the desired group, click Edit.
The Group Setup page appears.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. When finished, click OK.
The changes are saved.
2.12 Working with Location, Occupancy and Inspection
Questions
Administrators can set up custom questions to gather information for location, occupant and inspection
records. These questions will appear on the location, occupant or inspection profile, as appropriate.
Adding a Question
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Location/Occupancy/Inspections Custom Questions.
The Location/Occupancy/Inspection Custom Questions page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 42
5. Click Add.
The Service Defined Question page appears.
6. Using the provided fields, enter all desired information for the vehicle.
NOTES:
This screen may look different based on the type of answer (e.g., text box or selecting
from a predefined drop down menu) selected from the Question Type drop down menu.
Selecting the Active checkbox will allow the question to appear on the run form. Entering
a number in the Question # text box will define the order in which the question will
appear, relative to all other service defined questions.
The Question Group drop down menu will determine which type of profile the question
will appear on.
7. When finished, to save the new question in the system, click Submit.
OR
To return to the list of questions without saving the new question, click Back.
Editing a Question
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Location/Occupancy/Inspections Custom Questions.
The Location/Occupancy/Inspection Custom Questions page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 43
5. For the desired question, click Edit.
The question appears.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. When finished, to save the changes, click Submit.
2.13 Merging Occupants
Existing occupant records can be sent to a new location if an occupant has moved. This will keep all
information for the occupant current in the record without requiring re-entry of data.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Merge Occupants.
The Merge Occupants to New Location page appears.
5. From the New Location drop down menu, select the location to which the occupant(s) should be
moved.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 44
6. From the Occupants scroll list, select the occupant(s) to move.
HINT: To select multiple occupant records, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each desired
record.
7. Click Add
.
8. Click Merge.
The occupant records are merged.
2.14 Working with Custom Questions
Administrators can create new questions and a section to include them on their service’s run form. This
allows a particular service to gather data that is relevant to their service but may not be already included
in the form. Depending on permissions, all users will generally be able to view a list of these custom
questions, but only administrators will be able to edit them or add new questions.
The system also has a section for service defined questions; this section will not be used in the Fire
Bridge. It allows systems that use EMS run forms to add custom questions to EMS run forms.
Organizing Custom Questions on Run Forms
Special study questions are collected in a single section on the fire run form, which the
administrator can give an appropriate title. When creating and editing these custom questions,
administrators can use the Question # text box to define the order of each question.
To change the title of the section for service defined questions:
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Special Study Questions.
The Special Study Questions page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
5. At the top left of the page, click the Edit Header icon
The Header text box will appear.
P a g e | 45
.
6. Type the name of the new header.
7. Click the Save Header icon .
Viewing and Editing Special Study Questions
Administrators can view and edit service defined questions from the same place.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Special Study Questions.
A list of special study questions appears.
5. To view or edit a particular question, click the corresponding Edit icon
6. OPTIONAL: To change the question, available answers, or question setup,
a. Use the provided fields to enter all information about the question.
NOTE: For this option to appear on a run form, be sure to select the Enabled
checkbox.
b. When finished, to save the changes, click Submit.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 46
Adding a New Special Study Question
Only administrators can add a new special study question to the system.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Special Study Questions.
A list of existing questions appears.
5. Click Add Question.
A page to create a new question appears.
6. Using the provided fields, enter all desired information for the vehicle.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 47
NOTE: This screen may look different based on the type of answer (e.g., text box or
selecting from a predefined drop down menu) selected from the Question Type drop
down menu.
HINT: Selecting the Active checkbox will allow the question to appear on the run form.
Selecting tabs in the Tabs scroll box will display this question on each of the selected run
form tabs.
7. To mark this field as required so that it is marked with validation cues if left blank, in the
Required Field section, select Yes.
8. When finished, to save the new question in the system, click Submit.
To return to the list of questions without saving the new question, click Cancel.
2.15 Viewing and Editing Basic Service Information
Service information is used to provide contact and identification information to any persons who may have
access to the Fire Bridge or who receive exported data from the system. This is the information that
appears in the View Service Information section.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Service section, select Service Information.
The Service Info page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 48
5. OPTIONAL: To edit the service information,
a. From the bottom of the page, click Edit.
The page becomes editable.
b. Using the provided fields, change or enter any information about the service.
c. When finished, to save the information, click OK.
To return to the service information without making the changes, click Cancel.
2.16 Working with Stations
A service can create profiles within the Fire Bridge for multiple stations or divisions. Depending on the
permission groups set up for that service, most system users will be able to view the information for each
station, but administrators can also change the station information or add a new station to the system.
Viewing and Editing Station Information
Administrators can view existing station information and, if necessary, change the information for
a particular station.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 49
4. Under the Service section, select Stations.
A list of stations appears.
5. To view or edit information for a particular station, click the name, number or Field Bridge
Station icon
for that station.
A summary of the station information appears.
6. OPTIONAL: To edit the station information,
a. Click Edit.
b. Using the provided fields, enter any new or different information desired.
c. When finished, click Save.
Adding a New Station
Only administrators can add a new station to the system.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Service section, select Stations.
A list of existing stations appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 50
5. From below the list of stations, click Add a Station.
6. Using the provided fields, enter all desired information for the station.
NOTE: Be sure to enter at least a station number and name and specify whether the
station is active or inactive. Active stations can be worked with in the system, while
inactive stations will have their information stored in the list of stations but will not appear
anywhere else in the system.
7. When finished, to save the new station in the system, click OK.
OR
To clear all fields and start over, click Reset.
OR
To return to the list of stations without saving the new station, click Cancel.
Setting a Default Station
A default station is the station that will automatically be selected on new run forms. Your service
does not need to set a default station but can choose to do so to save data entry time. For this
feature to work, the station you select as the default station must be active.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 51
4. Under the Service section, select Stations.
A list of existing stations appears.
5. For the station to set as the default, in the Default Station column, click the checkbox.
A check appears, indicating that this is now set as the default station.
6. OPTIONAL: To remove any settings controlling the default station,
a. Click the Clear Default Station button.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
b. Click OK.
The default station settings are removed and no station is set as the default.
2.17 Working with Vehicle Information
Run forms can document the vehicles that responded to an incident if the vehicle information has been
added to the system. Depending on permissions, most system users will be able to view vehicle
information, but only administrators will be able to change vehicle information or add or delete a vehicle.
Vehicle profiles can also keep track of a vehicle’s mileage for the year.
Viewing and Editing Vehicle Information
Administrators can view existing vehicle information and, if necessary, change the information for
a particular vehicle.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Service section, select Vehicles.
A list of vehicles appears.
5. To view or edit information for a particular vehicle, click the Edit icon
A summary of the vehicle information appears.
7/19/2013
for that station.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 52
6. OPTIONAL: To edit the vehicle information,
a. Click Edit.
b. Using the provided fields, enter any new or different information desired.
c. When finished, click OK.
Viewing and Entering Vehicle Mileage
Administrators can keep track of a vehicle’s mileage for each year using the Fire Bridge.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Service section, select Vehicles.
A list of existing vehicles appears.
5. For the appropriate vehicle, click the corresponding Manage Mileage icon
All mileage totals saved in the system appear.
6. OPTIONAL: To add information about mileage for a new year,
a. Click Add Entry.
b. Using the provided fields, type all information about mileage.
c.
.
To save the information, click OK..
OR
To return to the list of mileage totals without saving, click Cancel.
Adding a New Vehicle
Only administrators can add a new vehicle to the system.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 53
4. Under the Service section, select Vehicles.
A list of existing vehicles appears.
5. From the top right, click Add a Vehicle.
A page to enter in the new vehicle information will appear.
6. Using the provided fields, enter all desired information for the vehicle.
NOTE: Be sure to enter at least the use of the vehicle, the vehicle’s station, the unit
number and call sign and the default vehicle type, and to mark the vehicle as active or
inactive. Active vehicles can be worked with in the system, while inactive vehicles will
have their information stored in the list of vehicles but will not appear anywhere else in
the system.
7. When finished, to save the new vehicle in the system, click OK.
OR
To clear all fields and start over, click Reset.
OR
To return to the list of vehicles without saving the new vehicle, click Cancel.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 54
2.18 Working with Zones or Districts
Administrators can add or edit zone or district information and target performance time for use in run
forms.
Adding a Zone or District Record
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Service section, select Zones/Districts.
The Zone/District Setup page appears.
5. Click Add Zone/District.
The Zone/District Setup page appears.
6. In the provided fields, enter information for the zone or district and the type of
zone/district it is (e.g., fire or EMS).
7. In the Target Performance Time section, enter the number of minutes that this service
should use as the target response time for calls within this zone.
8. When finished, click Save.
The record is saved.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 55
Editing a Zone or District Record
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Service.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Service section, select Zones/Districts.
The Zone/District Setup page appears.
5. For the desired zone or district, click the Edit icon
The Zone/District Setup page appears.
.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. When finished, click Save.
2.19 Working with Alarms
You can set up a list of all alarms that you want to be able to record on run forms under the Alarm grid, if
used.
Adding a New Alarm
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 56
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Alarms.
The Alarm Setup page appears.
5. Click Add New Alarm.
The Alarm Setup page appears.
6. In the Sort Order text box, type a number corresponding to this alarm’s desired position in
the list of alarms (e.g., 1 for first).
7. In the Alarm Name text box, type the name of the alarm.
8. To mark this alarm as active and available for selection from the run form, in the Current
Status section, select Active.
OR
To mark this alarm as inactive and available only for reference by administrators, in the
Current Status section, select Inactive.
9. When finished, click Submit.
The alarm record is saved.
Editing an Existing Alarm
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 57
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Alarms.
The Alarm Setup page appears.
5. For the alarm to edit, click the Edit button.
The Alarm Setup page appears.
6. Make any desired changes.
7. Click Submit.
The changes are saved.
2.20 Working with Census Tracts
You can set up the run form to request census tract information in either a text box or from a drop down
menu that you can set up with the relevant census tracts.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 58
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Census Tracts.
The Census Tracts Setup page appears.
5. In the Census Tracts Setup section, select the way that census tracts should be entered into the
run form.
6. OPTIONAL: If you chose to enter census tracts using a drop down menu, to add the options,
a. In the Add New Tract text boxes, type the tract number.
b. In the Sort Order text box, type the order in which this tract should be listed in relation to
other tracts in the list.
c. Click OK.
New fields appear for another record.
d. Repeat steps a–c until all desired records are added.
7. When finished, click OK.
2.21 Setting Up Optional Modules on Fire Run Forms
Service administrators can decide whether the EMS tab and the Apparatus/Personnel tab on the NFIRS
form will be available for providers to fill out or whether they will always be hidden.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 59
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Fire Optional Module Switch.
The Fire Optional Module Switch page appears.
5. In the EMS and the Apparatus/Personnel sections, select whether these tabs should be available
from NFIRS forms or hidden at all times.
6. When finished, click Submit.
Your changes are applied.
2.22 Managing Street and Highway Names
Your agency can set up the Address Lookup feature, which will force providers to select the street name
from a list of pre-defined street and highway names that you can set up. This can help prevent issues with
spelling mistakes or other data entry issues that may lead to documentation issues.
Before you turn the Address Lookup feature on, ImageTrend recommends that you set up your list of
street and highway names so that providers will have a list of names to select from when filling out forms.
Adding a Street Name
You can add street names manually until all the street and highway names that your agency
might need to document are available.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Streets/Highways.
The Streets/Highways Setup page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 60
5. Click Add Address.
The Address Setup page appears.
6. Using the provided fields, enter the appropriate information for the street or highway.
7. Click Submit.
The street or highway name is added to the database.
Turning on the Address Lookup Feature
You can enable the Address Lookup feature for your NFIRS run forms after you have set up the
streets that you want providers to be able to document.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Streets/Highways.
The Streets/Highways Setup page appears.
5. In the Address Lookup on NFIRS Run Form section, select Yes.
The Address Lookup feature is enabled.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 61
2.23 Setting NFIRS Field Defaults
You can set default values for specific fields on your NFIRS run forms. These values will be applied by
default to new NFIRS run forms that are created, although providers can change the values if needed.
This can be a good way to speed up data entry time by ensuring that common values are already filled in.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select NFIRS Field Defaults.
The Run Form Field Setup page appears.
5. Using the drop down menus, select the default value for each field that you want to have a default
value set.
6. When finished, click Submit.
The default values are set.
2.24 Working with Pay Rates
Administrators can set up pay rates for a variety of levels.
Adding a Pay Rate
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 62
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Pay Rates.
The Pay Rates Setup page appears.
5. Click Add New Pay Rate.
The Pay Rates Setup page refreshes.
6. In the Sort Order text box, type the order in which this rate should appear in the list of pay
rates.
7. In the Title text box, type an identifying name for this pay rate.
8. In the Rate text box, type the rate of pay.
9. In the Current Status section, indicate whether this pay rate should be currently active
and available for use.
10. When finished, click Submit.
Editing a Pay Rate
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Pay Rates.
The Pay Rates Setup page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 63
5. For the desired pay rate, click Edit.
The pay rate record appears.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. When finished, click Submit.
2.25 Working with Shifts and Platoons
You can set up a list of all shifts or platoons that you want to be able to record on run forms under the
Shifts or Platoons grid, if used.
Adding a Shift or Platoon
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Shifts or Platoons.
The Shifts or Platoon Setup page appears.
5. Click Add New Shifts or Platoon.
The Shifts or Platoon Setup page appears.
6. In the Sort Order text box, type a number corresponding to this shift/platoon’s desired
position in the list of shifts and platoons (e.g., 1 for first).
7. In the Shifts or Platoon Name text box, type the name of the shift/platoon.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 64
8. To mark this shift/platoon as active and available for selection from the run form, in the
Current Status section, select Active.
OR
To mark this shift/platoon as inactive and available only for reference by administrators,
in the Current Status section, select Inactive.
9. When finished, click Submit.
The shift/platoon record is saved.
Editing a Shift or Platoon Record
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Fire/NFIRS Form.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire/NFIRS Form section, select Shifts or Platoons.
The Shifts or Platoon Setup page appears.
5. For the shift/platoon to edit, click the Edit button.
The Shifts or Platoon Setup page appears.
6. Make any desired changes.
7. Click Submit.
The changes are saved.
2.26 Working with Contract Response Departments
Administrators can set up the departments that will display at the top of the Contract Response field on
the run form. This can allow you to record if your department has responded to a fire because of a
contract with another department.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Sorting Preferences.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 65
4. Under the Sorting Preferences section, select Contract Response Departments.
The Department Setup page appears.
5. To remove a department from the existing list, select the corresponding Delete checkbox.
6. To add a department to the list,
a. From the New Department scroll list, select the department to add.
b. To determine where this department will appear in the list, in the Sequence text box to
the right, type the desired order.
HINT: If no sequence is entered, this department will be added to the bottom of the
list.
c. Click OK.
7. To change the order of the departments, in the Sequence text boxes, type the desired new order.
8. When finished, click OK.
2.27 Working with Mutual Aid Departments
Administrators can edit the list of departments that will be available from a run form as providing mutual
aid.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Run Forms section, select Sorting Preferences.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 66
4. Under the Sorting Preferences section, select Mutual Aid Departments.
The Mutual Aid Department List Setup page appears.
5. To remove a department from the existing list, select the corresponding Delete checkbox.
6. To add a department to the list,
a. From the New Department scroll list, select the department to add.
b. To determine where this department will appear in the list, in the Sequence text box to
the right, type the desired order.
HINT: If no sequence is entered, this department will be added to the bottom of the
list.
c. Click OK.
7. To change the order of the departments, in the Sequence text boxes, type the desired new order.
8. When finished, click OK.
2.28 Working with Inspections Setup
There are several options you can set up for both your Web-based Inspections module and the
downloadable Inspections client application.
Setting Up Auto Inspection Numbers
Administrators can set up the format of inspection numbers that will be automatically applied each
time a new inspection form is started. Using automatic inspection numbers will prevent duplicate
inspections from being created, which will greatly reduce the risk of an inspection form being
unintentionally overwritten. Administrators can also set how often the inspection number should
be reset, depending on the volume of inspections done.
Your format for auto call numbers should be different from any other system submitting to the
same database (e.g., if you are submitting to a state system).
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Inspections section, select General.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 67
4. Under the General section, select Auto-Number for Inspections.
The Auto Inspection Number Setup page appears.
5. To enable automatic inspection number generation, in the Auto Inspection Number
section, select On.
6. In the Text 1 box, type any text to appear at the beginning of the inspection number.
7. From the Date Format drop down menu, select the format for the date information that
will be included in the call number.
8. In the Text 2 text box, type any text that will appear in the middle of the call number.
9. From the Auto-Number Format drop down menu, select the number of digits that will be
used at the end of the number.
HINT: These numbers will automatically increase by one with each inspection report
that is entered.
10. To start the last numbers of the call number over at 0 based on a period of time, from the
Reset Auto Number drop down menu, select how often to reset the number.
11. To manually set the next number that will be automatically generated, in the Next Auto
Number text box, type the next number.
12. To save the changes, click Submit.
Working with Inspection Types
Inspections can be classified by type for your records, and administrators can set up the desired
types. Inspection types can especially be helpful if you want to run reports about your inspections
based on specific categories.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Inspections section, select General.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 68
4. Under the General section, select Inspection Types.
The Inspection Types page appears.
5. To deactivate an existing inspection type, deselect the Active checkbox.
6. To add a new inspection type,
a. Click Add Inspection Type.
The Edit Inspection Type page appears.
b. In the Inspection Type text box, type a category for this inspection type.
HINT: This category name will not appear anywhere else, but can help you to
organize your inspection types.
c. In the Inspection Name text box, type the name of the inspection category.
d. In the Description text box, type a short description of the category.
NOTE: The inspection name and description will be combined when the
inspection type is displayed. For example, if the description is Permit and the
name is Fire Prevention Permit, the type will be displayed as Permit – Fire
Prevention Permit.
e. In the Fee text box, type any fee associated with inspections of this type.
f. In the Active section, select whether this type should currently be active and
available for use, or inactive and saved for reference.
g. To add a form for this inspection type,
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
i.
P a g e | 69
Select the desired form from the Available scroll list.
ii.
Click the Add icon
.
iii.
Repeat steps a–b until all desired inspection types are added.
h. When finished, click OK.
Working with Inspection Violation Codes
Administrators can add or update your own violation codes. If a new code has been added to
your code set, this option allows you to add it to the system immediately without waiting for an
update from ImageTrend.
Adding Inspection Violation Codes
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Inspections section, select General.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the General section, select Violation Codes.
The Violation Codes page appears.
5. Click Add Violation Code.
The Violation Record page appears.
6.
7.
8.
9.
7/19/2013
In the Code text box, type the code set used for this code.
In the Description text box, type descriptive information about the code.
In the Category text box, type a category for organization.
In the Day Limit text box, type the day limit for the violation.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 70
10. In the Fine text box, type the fine that should be required for this violation.
11. In the Active section, select whether this violation should currently be active and
available for use in the system.
12. When finished, click Add.
Editing Inspection Violation Codes
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Inspections section, select General.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the General section, select Violation Codes.
The Violation Codes page appears.
5. Click the desired violation code.
Editable fields for the code appear.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. When finished, click OK.
Working with Inspection Violation Letters
You can edit the templates used for sending violation letters after inspections using a template
from ImageTrend and fyiReporting Designer, a free downloadable application. This section will
explain how to download the template you can edit, upload an edited template and download the
fyiReporting Designer. For more information about editing the template, please refer to the Edit
Inspection Letter Templates quick guide.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 71
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Inspections section, select General.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the General section, select Violation Letters.
The Violation Letters page appears.
Downloading fyiReporting Designer
The fyiReporting Designer is a free download that you can use to edit the inspection letter
templates. This software must be installed on your computer before you can begin
working with the templates. It is included in the installation package for the Fire
Inspections client; if the Fire Inspections application is not on your computer you will need
to download fyiReporting Designer.
You must have administrative privileges to the computer you are working with in order to
download and install the software.
1. At the bottom of the Violation Letters page, click the FYI Reporting link.
The Downloads Web page appears in a new window.
2. Locate the link for the most recent release.
HINTS:
This page will be updated as new versions of the software are released.
You will be looking for the section with the most recent release number and date,
but without a reference to the word “source.”
3. Click the Download Installation link.
The File Download dialog box appears.
4. Click Run.
The Security Warning dialog box appears.
5. Click Run.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 72
Downloading a Template to Work With
To begin editing templates, you must have a template to work with. You can download
this through your Fire Bridge or Rescue Bridge.
1. At the bottom of the Violation Letters page, click the here link.
The File Download dialog box appears.
2. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to a location where you will be able to find this template again.
4. Click Save.
The download is completed.
5. If necessary, in the Download Complete dialog box, click Close.
Uploading a Finished Template
Once you are finished editing a template, you can upload it to the Fire Bridge system to
make it available for use.
1. From the Violation Letters page, click Upload Violation Letter.
The Upload Violation Letters page appears.
2. In the New Template section, click Browse.
The File Upload dialog box appears.
3. Navigate to and select the desired template.
4. Click Open.
The dialog box closes and the template file is selected.
5. Click Open.
The template is added.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 73
Configuring Fire Inspections Client Settings
You can set up default settings for the Fire Inspection systems, allowing you to maintain constant
settings for all field systems.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Inspections section, select Inspections Client.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Inspections Client section, select Configuration.
The Fire Inspections Configuration page appears.
5. In the Default Inspection to “Passed” section, select whether new inspection records
should automatically be marked as passed unless an inspector changes the status.
6. In the Show the fees box section, select where a field should for any fees that are due on
the Inspections Dashboard should be displayed.
7. In the Show Received Date section, select whether the date that a notification of an
upcoming inspection was received should be displayed.
NOTE: This is most useful if a fire marshal or other overseer is setting up inspections.
8. In the Auto-Populate Received Date section, select whether the date should be
automatically entered when a notification is received.
NOTE: This option is only available if the Received Date field is active.
9. In the Auto-Populate Completed Date section, select whether the current date should be
automatically entered as the date that the inspection is completed.
10. In the Auto-Populate Scheduled Date section, select whether the current date should be
automatically entered as the date that the inspection was scheduled for.
11. In the Lock Location Address section, select whether the address of the location should
be non-editable in inspection forms.
HINT: In this case, the address will be taken from the location profile that is
associated with the occupant for this inspection.
12. In the Lock Occupant Address section, select whether the address of the occupant
should be non-editable in inspection forms.
HINT: In this case, the address will be taken from the occupant profile on which this
inspection is being done.
13. In the Lock Location Code section, select whether the location code information should
be non-editable in inspection forms.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 74
HINT: In this case, the code will be taken from the location profile that is associated
with the occupant for this inspection.
14. In the Populate Occupant Address with Location Address section, select whether the
occupant’s address should be automatically entered from the address in the location
profile.
15. When finished, click Submit.
2.29 Documenting Times with No Fire Calls to Report
At times, your service may have no fire calls to report to the state. The Fire Bridge allows you to record
both months with no fire calls and any non-fire related incidents that may have occurred in that month.
For months with only non-fire related calls, you must submit a record of no fire calls and a separate record
of the number of non-fire related calls. Refer to the following sections for additional information about
documenting these situations.
Documenting No Fire Calls
Any month when you have no calls requiring an NFIRS report, you can report that to the state.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select No Runs to Report.
The Document No Runs to Report page appears.
3. Click No Fire Runs.
The No Fire Runs page appears.
4. Click Add No Runs.
The No Fire Runs page appears.
5. From the Month drop down menu, select the month for which you want to report no calls.
6. From the Year drop down menu, select the year for which this report is being made.
7. When finished, click OK.
The report is added.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 75
Documenting Non-Fire Related Calls
In a month with no fire related calls, you can also create a record to document the number of calls
you received that were not fire related and did not require an NFIRS form. Do not use this section
to report any call that required an NFIRS report.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select No Runs to Report.
The Document No Runs to Report page appears.
3. Click Non-Fire Related Runs.
The Non-Fire Related Runs page appears.
4. Click Add Non-Fire Related Runs.
The Non-Fire Related Runs page appears.
5. From the Month and Year drop down menus, select the time in which these calls
occurred.
6. In the appropriate text boxes, type the number of calls or each type that your service
responded to for this month.
7. When finished, at the bottom of the page, click OK.
The record of non-fire related incidents is saved.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 76
CHAPTER 3
WORKING WITH TRAINING AND ACTIVITIES INFORMATION
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 77
3.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the options available to service administrators for training and
activities, including information about setting up categories, templates, topics, time calculation options
and individual training and activity records.
Options for setting up categories, templates and topics may not always be available to you at the service
level, depending on the permissions settings for your system. If these options are available, you may see
some options that are already set up at the system level. You will not be able to edit system level items,
but you can add your own items for your service.
3.2 Working with Training and Activity Categories
Categories allow administrators to sort templates based on the type of activity or training for better
organization. Administrators can create several levels of categories (e.g., a category for field work
courses could be created under a main category of fire inspector coursework).
Options for setting up categories may not be available to you at the service level, depending on the
permissions settings for your system. If these options are available, you may see some categories that
are already set up at the system level. You will not be able to edit system level items, but you can add
your own categories for your service and you can mark system categories that your service does not use
as inactive.
Viewing and Editing Categories
When editing a category that has subcategories, the sub-categories must be removed before
editing is possible. Categories for both activities and training will be displayed. Subcategories will
appear below and slightly indented from their parent category. The Manage Categories page will
display a list of categories and sub-categories, information about whether each category relates
to activities or training and whether the category is active in the system or not.
Keep in mind that for system categories, you will only be able to change their status between
being active or inactive.
1. From the upper right, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
The Setup page appears.
3. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 78
4. Under Activities and Training, click Categories.
The Categories page appears.
NOTE: The training and activity categories are separated into different tables. The
training categories are in the first table, the activities are in the second table. You may
need to scroll down to view the table with the activity categories.
5. To edit a sub-category,
a. Click the corresponding Edit link to the right of category name.
b. Using the provided fields, make the desired changes.
NOTES:
Categories that are fully editable are marked with the Permissions icon
in the
Permissions section of the table.
Changing the parent category will move this sub-category to another main
category.
Changing the text in the Category field will change the name of the category.
Changing the Active status will change whether the category can be used in the
system or not.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 79
c.
When finished, to keep the changes, click Update.
OR
d. To return to the list of categories without editing, click Back.
6. To edit a parent category,
a. Edit all sub-categories and move them to another parent category.
b. For the category, click Edit.
c. If this category will remain a parent category, from the Parent Category drop
down menu, select NONE.
If this category will become a sub-category, from the Parent Category drop down
menu, select the desired parent category.
d. In the Category text field, make any changes to the category name.
e. From the Type drop down menu, select whether this category should apply to
activities or training records.
f. In the Active section, select whether this category should be available for use in
the system or unavailable but stored if necessary.
g. When finished, to keep the changes, click Update.
To return to the list of categories without editing, click Back.
Adding Categories
Administrators can create new parent categories and sub-categories.
1. From the upper right, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
The Setup page appears.
3. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Activities and Training, click Categories.
The Categories page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 80
5. Click Add Training Category or Add Activities Category, as appropriate.
The Add Category page appears.
6. From the Parent Category drop down menu, select the desired option.
HINT: If the new category will be a parent category, select NONE.
If the new category will be a sub-category, select the category under which it should be
stored.
7. In the Category text box, type the name of the category.
8. From the Type drop down menu, select whether the category should be used for
activities or training.
9. In the Active section, select whether this category should be available for use (Yes)or
stored for future use or reference (No).
10. When finished, to save the category, click Add.
To return to the list of categories without saving, click Back.
Setting Access to Categories
You will be able to control which permission groups will have access to service categories and to
templates within this category.
1. From the upper right, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
The Setup page appears.
3. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Activities and Training, click Categories.
The Categories page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 81
5. Click the Permissions icon
for the desired category.
The Permissions page appears.
6. To change a specific permission group’s access to this category,
a. Select the checkbox for the desired category.
b. Select the desired level of access.
Owner
Groups with this permission level will have full control over training
and activity records created from this template.
NOTE: In order for someone to edit attendee records and mark
them as approved or pending, they must have Owner level rights to
the template.
Add/Edit
Groups with this permission level will be able to add new trainings or
activities based on this template and will be able to edit those
records, but will not be able to approve or edit attendee records.
View
Groups with this permission level will be able to view training and
activity records created from this template but will not be able to
change or add them.
Hide
This permission level will hide any training and activity records
created from this template.
c.
7/19/2013
HINT: These icons will be used in all permission settings for activities and
training.
Click OK.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 82
3.3 Working with Templates
Each training or activity record that is added to the system must be based off a template, which will
contain most of the information for that record. This information will be copied to the individual record,
although based on the permissions the administrator sets some information may be editable in each
record created from the template. Administrators can edit existing templates or create new ones.
Adding New Templates
Administrators can set up new templates for training or activity records for your service.
When you create a new training/activity template, you can assign permissions to each section of
that template. If you choose to hide a section, that information will not be displayed for any
trainings/activities created from the template. If you choose View permissions for a section, that
section will be read-only and so will be the same for all trainings/activities created from this
template. If you choose Add/Edit permissions for a section, that information can be added or
changed for each individual training/activity created from the template.
1. From the upper right, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
The Setup page appears.
3. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under Activities and Training, click Templates.
The Templates page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 83
5. Click Add Template.
The Add Template page appears.
6. To designate access to each aspect of the template when records are created from it,
select the correct level of permission for each aspect.
NOTE: This will select whether this information will be available to view or edit when
individual records are created.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 84
7. To select which user groups will be able to make changes to the template or records
created from the template, in the Group Permissions section, select the desired
permissions for each group.
Owner
Groups with this permission level will have full control over training and activity
records created from this template.
NOTE: In order for someone to edit attendee records and mark them as
approved or pending, they must have Owner level rights to the template.
Add/Edit
Groups with this permission level will be able to add new trainings or
activities based on this template and will be able to edit those records, but
will not be able to approve or edit attendee records.
View
Groups with this permission level will be able to view training and activity
records created from this template but will not be able to change or add
them.
Hide
This permission level will hide any training and activity records created from
this template.
NOTE: When permissions differ between group permissions and permissions
for individual elements of the template, the lower level of permission will be
applied.
8. From the Category and Sub-Category drop down menus, select the category and subcategory trainings/activities created from this template should be assigned to.
9. In the Name text box, type a name for trainings/activities created from this template.
10. In the Description text box, type any additional details about the trainings/activities.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 85
11. In the Start Date and End Date text boxes, type the dates that trainings/activities created
from this template should start and end.
OR
To select the date(s) from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
and select the desired
date.
HINT: For most templates, these fields are left blank and the permissions are set to
Add/Edit so that the correct dates can be filled in for each individual training or activity
record.
12. In the Start Time and End Time text boxes, type the times that trainings/activities created
from this template should start and end.
HINT: For most templates, these fields are left blank and the permissions are set to
Add/Edit so that the correct dates can be filled in for each individual training or activity
record.
13. In the Date of Renewal text box, type the date that trainings or activities based on this
template will need to be renewed.
OR
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
To select the date from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
and select the desired
date.
HINT: For most templates, this field is left blank and the permissions are set to
Add/Edit so that the correct date can be filled in for each individual training or activity
record.
In the Certification Requirements section, select the checkbox(es) for any certifications
that trainings or activities created from this template will meet.
In the Hours Required text box, type the number of hours trainings or activities created
from this template will be held for.
If the number of hours entered as required is the maximum number of hours allowed,
select the Maximum accepted hours checkbox.
In the Code text box, type the code to be associated with any training or activity created
from this template.
In the Trainer text box, type the name of the trainer who will be in charge of trainings or
activities created from this template.
In the Station, Call Sign, Vehicle, ApparatusID and Shift text boxes, type the appropriate
information to be associated with trainings or activities created from this template.
OR
To look the information up from the options that are set up for your service, click the Look
up icon
for each text box and select the appropriate option.
NOTE: The call sign, vehicle, and apparatus ID text boxes are hidden from the user
by default.
In the Total Attendees text box, type the number of attendees to be associated with any
training or activity created from this template.
In the Attendance Mandatory section, select whether attendance for trainings and
activities created from this template will be mandatory.
In the Location text box, type the location that should be assigned to any trainings or
activities created from this template.
To add training certifications that trainings or activities created from this template will
count towards,
a. In the Training Certifications section, from the Available scroll list, select the
desired certification(s).
HINT: To select multiple options at the same time, press and hold the Ctrl key
while clicking each desired option.
b. Click the Add icon
.
24. To add training topics that trainings or activities created from this template will address,
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 86
a. In the Training Topics section, from the Available scroll list, select the desired
topic(s).
HINT: To select multiple options at the same time, press and hold the Ctrl key
while clicking each desired option.
b. Click the Add icon
.
25. In the ID to Display section, select whether you want the payroll ID or the personnel ID for
attendees of trainings or activities created from this template to be displayed.
26. In the Active section, select whether you want this template to be active and available for
creating individual records from, or inactive and saved for reference only.
27. To set default values that will be applied to attendees who are assigned to trainings or
activities created from this template,
HINT: You may not use all these options, depending on what information your service
tracks for attendees of training and activities and how much of this information you want
to set up manually for each training/activity or even each attendee.
a. In the Approval Status section, select whether attendees should be automatically
marked as approved or pending.
b. In the Hours/Days value, type the maximum number of hours or days that is
allowable for attendees.
c. In the Hours Attended text box, type the number of hours that should be
assigned by default.
d. In the Score text box, type any score that should be assigned by default.
e. In the Time Attended section, select the beginning and ending time that should
be assigned to attendees by default.
f. In the Paid section, select whether attendees of trainings and activities created
from this template should be paid by default.
g. If you chose for attendees to be paid, from the Pay Rate drop down menu, select
the pay rate for attendees.
h. In the Pass/Fail section, select whether attendees should be marked as passing
or failing by default for trainings or activities created from this template.
i. To set positions for this training,
i.
In the Positions section, from the Available scroll list, select the desired
position(s).
HINT: To select multiple options at the same time, press and hold the
Ctrl key while clicking each desired option.
ii.
Click the Add icon
.
28. To set the level of access that each permission group will have to individual templates
and activities created from this record, for each group, select the appropriate level of
permissions.
29. When finished, to keep the template, click OK.
To return to the list of templates without saving, click Back.
Viewing and Editing Templates
Administrators can view detailed information about a template and make any changes. Changes
can be made to information about the template itself (e.g., the name and category, time and date
or certifications fulfilled) and the permissions access to the template (i.e., what information can be
changed when creating an individual record from the template and who can edit the template).
1. From the upper right, click My Fire Department.
2. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 87
3. Under Activities and Training, click Templates.
The Templates page appears.
4. For the desired template, click Edit (Type) Template.
5. To designate access to each aspect of the template when records are created from it,
select the correct level of permission for each aspect.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 88
NOTE: This will select whether this information will be available to view or edit when
individual records are created.
6. To change information within the template, use the provided fields to make any changes.
7. To select which user groups will be able to make changes to the template or records
created from the template, in the Group Permissions section, select the desired
permissions for each group.
NOTE: When permissions differ between group permissions and permissions for
individual elements of the template, the lower level of permission will be applied.
8. When finished, to keep the changes, click OK.
To return to the list of templates, click Back.
3.4 Setting Up Training/Activity Topics
You can create a collection of topics that can be covered during your trainings and activities. Each
template and event can then be associated with the topics covered.
Creating a New Topic
You can create a new topic to be available for trainings and activities at any time.
1. From the upper right, click My Fire Department.
2. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Activities and Training, click Topics.
The Topics page appears.
4. Click Add Topic.
The Add Topic page appears.
5. In the Topic Name text box, type the name of the topic.
6. To mark this topic as active and available to be used on templates and training/activity
records, select the Active checkbox.
OR
To mark this topic as inactive and available only for reference, deselect the Active
checkbox.
7. Click OK.
The new topic is added.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 89
Editing a Training/Activity Topic
You can make updates to an existing topic that is used for classifying trainings and activities if
needed.
1. From the upper right, click My Fire Department.
2. Under Service Settings And Resources, click Activities and Training.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Under Activities and Training, click Topics.
The Topics page appears.
4. For the topic you want to update, from the Actions column, click Edit.
The topic information appears.
5. In the Topic Name text box, make any desired changes to the name of the topics.
6. To mark this topic as active and available to be used on templates and training/activity
records, select the Active checkbox.
OR
To mark this topic as inactive and available only for reference, deselect the Active
checkbox.
7. Click OK.
The topic is updated.
3.5 Setting Training and Activity Time Calculations
A service administrator can control whether the system provides credits for the exact amount of time
assigned to a training or activity or rounds to the nearest tenth (e.g., with rounding, a 1 hour and 15
minute class will be rounded to 1.3 hours while with exact time, the same class will be recorded as 1.25
hours).
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Select the Setup tab.
3. Under the Service Settings and Resources section, select Fire.
A sub-menu appears.
4. Under the Fire section, select Training/Activity Time Calculation.
The Training/Activities Time Calculation Setup page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 90
5. To round training and activity hours to the nearest hour, select Round.
OR
To track the exact minutes and hours, select Actual Time.
6. Click OK.
The settings are applied.
3.6 Working with Training Records
Administrators can view records of training events that are stored in the system, or may create or edit
records. These records can contain information about the course itself, including the information covered,
times and location of the training and certifications towards which it counts, information about attendees
and documents that may be relevant to the course. Training records are based on templates, which
contain information that can be copied into each course record.
Viewing and Editing Training Records
Administrators can view a list of training records currently in the system or can edit the
information. When editing a training record, administrators can also add information about the
attendees and the information about the course added to their record, or can add documents
related to the course.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Training.
A list of training records appears.
HINT: If you do not see the course you want to look at, use the fields at the top of the
page to change the search terms until you see the desired training.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 91
3. From the list, click the name of the desired course.
4. To change any information about the course, from the Training Information tab, use the
provided fields to make the desired changes and click OK.
NOTE: The information available to edit will depend on the setup of the template from
which this record was created.
5. To work with information about attendees, select the Attendees tab.
6. To edit information about the attendees, use the provided fields for each attendee to
make changes and click OK.
NOTE: The information available to edit will depend on the setup of the template from
which this record was created.
HINT: To set information that will be the same for all attendees, type the information
in the Default Values row. This information will be copied to all attendees unless
individual changes are made.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 92
7. To work with documents that may be attached to the record, select the Documents tab.
8. To add a new document,
a. In the Attached Document section, click Add New Document.
b. In the Title text box, type a name for the document.
c. In the Description text box, type additional information about the document.
d. Click Browse…
e. Navigate to and select the document to be attached to the record.
f. Click Open.
g. Click Submit.
The document is attached to the record.
9. To edit the name or description of an existing document,
a. Click the corresponding Edit icon
.
b. In the Title text box, make any changes to the document’s name.
c. In the Description text box, make any changes to the additional information about
the document.
d. When finished, click Submit.
10. To return to the list of training records, select the Training Home tab.
Adding Training Records
Administrators can create new training records based on the templates available in the system.
Based on the setup of the template, these records can be configured to apply to the specific
course or training event.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 93
2. Under the Modules tab, select Training.
A list of training records appears.
3. Click Add Training.
A list of training templates from which records can be created appears.
4. For the template from which the record should be created, click Add Training Record.
The Add Record page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 94
NOTE: The options available in this template may differ from those pictured and
explained here based on the setup of the template.
5. In the Name text box, type a name for this training.
6. In the Description text box, type any additional details about this training.
7. In the Start Date and End Date text boxes, type the dates that this training will start and
end.
OR
To select the date(s) from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
and select the desired
date.
8. In the Start Time and End Time text boxes, type the times this training will start and end.
9. In the Date of Renewal text box, type the date that this training will need to be renewed.
OR
To select the date from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
and select the desired
date.
10. In the Certification Requirements section, select the checkbox(es) for any certifications
that this training will meet.
11. In the Hours Required text box, type the number of hours this training will be held for.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 95
12. If the number of hours entered as required is the maximum number of hours allowed,
select the Maximum accepted hours checkbox.
13. In the Code text box, type the code to be associated with this training.
14. In the Trainer text box, type the name of the trainer who will be in charge of this training.
15. In the Station, Call Sign, Vehicle, ApparatusID and Shift text boxes, select the
appropriate information to be associated with this training.
16. In the Total Attendees text box, type the number of attendees for this training.
NOTE: You can add additional attendees later if needed, this will automatically set up
that number of slots for the class as soon as it is saved.
17. In the Attendance Mandatory section, select whether attendance this training is
mandatory.
18. In the Location text box, type the location of this training.
19. To add training certifications that this training will count towards,
a. In the Training Certifications section, from the Available scroll list, select the
desired certification(s).
HINT: To select multiple options at the same time, press and hold the Ctrl key
while clicking each desired option.
b. Click the Add icon
.
20. To add training topics that this training will address,
a. In the Training Topics section, from the Available scroll list, select the desired
topic(s).
HINT: To select multiple options at the same time, press and hold the Ctrl key
while clicking each desired option.
b. Click the Add icon
.
21. In the ID to Display section, select whether you want the payroll ID or the personnel ID for
attendees to be displayed.
22. When finished, click Save.
Additional tabs appear to complete more information about the course.
23. To add information about attendees,
NOTE: The options available on this page to record attendee details may be different
for the training you are setting up based on your template.
a. Select the Attendees tab.
The Attendees tab appears, with lines set up for the number of people specified
during the training creation.
b. From the Attendees drop down menus, select the names of the staff members
who will be attending the course.
c. In the Time In and Time Out text boxes, type the time that each attendee arrived
and departed the training.
HINT: To set a value that will be applied for all attendees, type the
appropriate Default Values row. They will be copied to each attendee, and you
can make individual changes for each attendee as needed.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 96
d. In the Paid section, select whether each attendee should be paid for the time
attending this training.
HINT: To set a value that will be applied for all attendees, select the
appropriate option in the Default Values row. This will be copied to each
attendee, and you can make individual changes for each attendee as needed.
e. For paid attendees, from the Pay Rate drop down menu, select the rate at which
attendees should be paid.
HINT: To set a value that will be applied for all attendees, select the
appropriate option in the Default Values row. It will be copied to each attendee,
and you can make individual changes for each attendee as needed.
f. In the Pass/Fail section, select whether each attendee passed or failed the
course.
HINT: To set a value that will be applied for all attendees, select the
appropriate option in the Default Values row. It will be copied to each attendee,
and you can make individual changes for each attendee as needed.
g. In the Score text box, type the score for each attendee.
HINT: To set a value that will be applied for all attendees, type the
appropriate option in the Default Values row. It will be copied to each attendee,
and you can make individual changes for each attendee as needed.
h. In the Approved/Pending/Disapprove section, select whether each attendee’s
attendance is approved, pending or disapproved for this training.
HINT: To set a value that will be applied for all attendees, select the
appropriate option in the Default Values row. It will be copied to each attendee,
and you can make individual changes for each attendee as needed.
i. To add a new attendee, click Add Attendee and enter information into the
resulting new row.
j. When finished, click Save.
24. To attach documents to the record,
a. Select the Documents tab.
b. Click Add New Document.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 97
The Document Upload page appears.
c. In the Title text box, type a name for the document.
d. In the Description text box, type additional information about the document.
e. Click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
f. Navigate to and select the document to be attached to the record.
g. Click Open.
h. Click Submit.
The document is attached to the record.
3.7 Working with Activities Records
Administrators can view records of activity events that are stored in the system, or may create or edit
records. These records can contain information about the activity itself, including a short description of the
activity, the location of the event and information about staff members attending the event. Activity
records are based on templates, which contain information that can be copied into each record.
Viewing and Editing Activity Records
Administrators can view a list of activity records currently in the system or can edit the
information. When editing a record, administrators can also add information about the attendees
and the information about the course added to those attendees’ records, or can add documents
related to the activity.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Activities.
A list of activity records appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 98
HINT: If you do not see the activity you want to look at, use the fields at the top of the
page to change the search terms until you see the desired activity.
3. From the list, click the name of the desired activity.
4. To change any information about the activity, from the Activities Information tab, use the
provided fields to make the desired changes and click OK.
NOTE: The information available to edit will depend on the setup of the template from
which this record was created.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 99
5. To work with information about attendees, select the Attendees tab.
6. To edit information about the attendees, use the provided fields for each attendee to
make changes and click OK.
NOTE: The information available to edit will depend on the setup of the template from
which this record was created.
HINT: To set information that will be the same for all attendees, type the information
in the Default Values row. This information will be copied to all attendees unless
individual changes are made.
7. To work with documents that may be attached to the record, select the Documents tab.
8. To add a new document,
a. Click Add New Document.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 100
The Document Upload page appears.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
In the Title text box, type a name for the document.
In the Description text box, type additional information about the document.
Click Choose File.
Navigate to and select the document to be attached to the record.
Click Open.
Click Submit.
The document is attached to the record.
9. To edit the name or description of an existing document,
a. Click the corresponding Edit icon
.
b. In the Title text box, make any changes to the document’s name.
c. In the Description text box, make any changes to the additional information about
the document.
d. When finished, click Submit.
10. To return to the list of records, select the Activities Home tab.
Adding Activities Records
Administrators can create new activity records based on the templates available in the system.
Based on the setup of the template, these records can be configured to apply to the specific
event.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Activities.
A list of activity records appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 101
3. Click Add Activities.
A list of activity templates from which records can be created appears.
4. For the template from which the record should be created, click Add Activities Record.
A record based on that template will appear.
5. Using the provided fields, add or change any information to complete the record.
NOTE: The fields available for editing will differ based on the setup of the template on
which this record is based.
6. When finished, click OK.
Additional tabs appear to complete more information about the activity.
7. To add information about attendees,
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 102
a. Select the Attendees tab.
b. From the Attendees drop down menus, select the names of the staff members
who will be attending the course.
OR
In the Personnel ID text box, type the ID numbers for the attendees.
NOTE: If entering the personnel ID numbers, the names will automatically be
filled in if the ID numbers are included
c. OPTIONAL: To enter information that will be the same for all attendees, enter
information into the fields in the Default Values row.
This information will be copied into the fields for all attendees but can be
changed for specific attendees if necessary.
d. To change information for specific attendees, enter the correct information in the
corresponding fields.
e. To add a new attendee, click Add Attendee and enter information into the
resulting new row.
f. When finished, click OK.
8. To attach documents to the record,
a. Select the Documents tab.
b. Click Add New Document.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 103
The Document Upload page appears.
c. In the Title text box, type a name for the document.
d. In the Description text box, type additional information about the document.
e. Click Choose File.
f. Navigate to and select the document to be attached to the record.
g. Click Open.
9. Click Submit.
The document is attached to the record.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 104
CHAPTER 4
WORKING WITH STAFF INFORMATION
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 105
4.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how administrators can view, change or add information for staff profiles, and how
to assign staff and vehicles to shifts. If this information remains current in the Fire Bridge, data entry for
reports can be considerably more efficient and easy.
4.2 Staff Profile Information
Staff profiles contain a variety of information about the staff member. This information can be used to
automatically fill out run forms; keep track of the staff member’s history, certifications and issued
equipment; administer their access to the Fire Bridge and store contact and demographic information.
This information is organized into tabs in the editable profile. Staff profiles also give staff members a
username and password to sign in to the Fire Bridge. This information is organized into tabs in the
editable profile. Each staff member of a service who has access to the Fire Bridge or who may be
included on a run form should have a profile created in the system.
The main page listing all user profiles will display basic information about each record.
To access a staff profile:
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
2. Select the Staff tab.
A list of staff profiles appears.
3. From the list of staff profiles, click the name of the desired staff member.
4. To return to the list of staff members at any point, click the Back to Staff List button.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 106
The Demographics Tab
The Demographics tab determines the name that will appear in this user’s profile and for all other
system functions working with this user, stores contact and personal information and allows users
and administrators to upload photographs of the staff member.
To change or add this information:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
2. If necessary, select the Demographics tab.
3. From the Demographics tab, use the provided fields to enter or change any information.
Signing Up for ImageTrend Email Notifications
ImageTrend periodically sends out email notifications regarding our products, including
information about scheduled downtime due to maintenance or upcoming upgrades to the
Rescue Bridge. If you want to be included on these notifications or want a specific staff
member to be included, you can add someone to the email list through the Demographics
tab of a staff profile.
1. Open the Demographics tab of the staff profile.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 107
2. In the Email Notifications section, select Yes.
The selected staff member will be added to the email list with the email
addresses record in the staff profile.
The Employment Tab
The Employment tab keeps track of the user’s history with the service, including their position and
status, length of service, ID numbers and any leaves of absence that have been taken. The staff
member can also be assigned to a particular station in this tab, and roles such as primary
contact, medical director or inspector can be assigned to the profile.
To add or change this information:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 108
2. If necessary, select the Employment tab.
3. In the Employment Information section, enter information about the staff member’s
situation at the service.
NOTE: If you do not enter a personnel ID, no one will be able to record this person in
the Apparatus and Personnel section of NFIRS reports.
4. In the Stations section, select all stations with which the profile should be associated.
HINT: The user will be able to access information designated to all stations to which
they are assigned, and will be available in all lists of staff by station for those selected
stations.
5. In the Leave of Absence section, enter all information to be documented for a leave of
absence for this staff member.
6. When finished, click OK.
All employment information is saved.
The Certifications Tab
The Certifications tab keeps track of staff members’ certifications and their respective dates.
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 109
2. If necessary, click the Certifications tab.
3. To edit or add information about a national certification, state certification or agencyspecific certification,
a. In the desired section, click Click Here to Edit (Type) Registry Certification Info.
b. Using the provided fields, enter or change any desired information.
4. To enter information about a fire certification, in the Fire Certification section,
a. Using the provided fields, enter any information about the certification.
b. Click Save Fire Certification.
The certification appears in the list.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired certifications are added.
5. When finished, to save the changes, click OK.
The Permissions Tab
The Permissions tab controls the user’s access to the Fire Bridge system. This includes the
user’s username and password, Fire Bridge permission group and individual access rights and
account status. Please note that all information pertaining to the Field Bridge will not be used, as
it pertains to systems that collect EMS data.
To work with this information:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 110
2. If necessary, click the Permissions tab.
3. To change the username or password, in the corresponding text boxes, make the desired
change.
NOTE: If the user’s password is changed by anyone other than the user him- or
herself, the user will be prompted to change the password after logging in.
HINT: To force a user to change their password, select the Reset User Password
checkbox.
4. To change the user’s permission group, from the Permission Group drop down menu,
select the correct group.
5. To change specific access rights,
a. Click View Permissions.
The Permissions for (User) window appears.
b. Select and deselect checkboxes to allow and prevent access to particular
functions.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 111
HINT: Selecting a checkbox allows the user to access that function.
Deselecting the checkbox prevents access.
View My EMS Runs Only
This option will not be used, as it pertains to systems using EMS run
forms. Gives the user access to past EMS run reports only if they
were submitted from his or her account.
View My Fire Runs Only
Gives the user access to past fire incident reports only if they were
submitted from his or her account.
Runs Forms
Determines the level of access the user will have to run forms that
they are allows to access. If the user is denied access to specific run
forms (e.g., if they are allowed to view run forms only they have
submitted or only within a certain time frame), that will take priority
over the level of access given here.
Ability to Lock Runs
Determines whether this user will have the authority to prevent
changes from being made to run forms after they are submitted.
Ability to Change Run Status
Determines whether this user will have the authority to change the
status assigned to a run form (e.g., in progress, reviewed, billed).
View Patient Identifiable Information
This option will not be used, as it pertains to systems using EMS run
forms. This option determines whether this user will be allowed to
view patient identifiable information on run forms.
View PDF Reports for EMS Runs
This option will not be used, as it pertains to systems using EMS run
forms. This determines whether the user will be able to view PDF
reports from EMS run forms.
View PDF Reports for Fire Runs
Determines whether the user will be able to view PDF reports from
fire run forms.
View ‘All’ QA/QI Notes
Determines whether the user will be able to work with all QA/QI
notes submitted through the system or only with which he or she was
associated.
View Unified PDF
This option will not be used, as it pertains to systems using EMS run
forms. This determines whether the user will be able to view the
Unified PDF report for EMS run forms.
Ability to switch run form template
This option will not be used, as it pertains to systems using EMS run
forms. Determines whether this user will be able to change EMS run
form templates after a run form is started.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 112
Ability to Lock Trainings
Determines whether this user will be able to lock training records to
prevent them from being edited.
Restrict Based on Date
Allows the user to view run forms submitted in only the specified time
frame.
c. When finished, click Submit.
6. To activate or inactivate the account, in the Current Status section, select the desired
option.
7. If the user’s account has been locked, to reset it, in the Lock Status section, select
Unlock.
OR
If you want to lock a user’s profile, in the Lock Status section, select Lock.
8. If using security questions, to force the user to re-enter the answers for those questions,
select the Reset All Security Answers checkbox.
NOTE: If editing your own profile, the security questions and answers will appear on
this page for editing.
9. When finished, to save the changes, click OK.
The Emergency Contacts Tab
The Emergency Contacts tab keeps contact information for persons who need to be informed in
the event of an emergency involving the employee.
To work with information for contacts:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
2. If necessary, click the Emergency Contacts tab.
3. To edit a contact’s information or view additional notes, click the Edit icon and make any
changes in the updated text boxes below.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 113
The Equipment Tab
The Equipment tab can keep track of any gear or equipment that is checked out to this individual.
Each record can contain a description of the item, an ID number, size and the dates allocated and
returned. The equipment listed here will be automatically displayed based on allocations in the
Inventory module.
To work with equipment:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
2. If necessary, select the Equipment tab.
The Equipment tab appears, with a list of all items that have been allocated to this staff
member.
3. OPTIONAL: To update an allocation record,
a. Click the View Allocation icon
in the Edit column for the desired item.
The details for the item appear at the bottom of the page.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 114
b. From the upper right corner of the Allocation Details panel, click Edit.
c.
Use the provided fields to enter the updated details.
HINT: If you enter a date in the Date Returned field, this item will be marked
as returned and will no longer be allocated to this staff member.
d. From the upper right corner of the Allocation Details panel, click Save.
The details are updated.
The Training Tab
The Training tab keeps records of any continuing education courses that the staff member may
complete to update certifications or further their training. Each course record can contain
information about the type of class, hours required and completed for the course and the dates of
the course and of renewal.
To work with training records:
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
2. If necessary, click the Training tab.
A list of training records for this staff member appears.
3. To select a date range for the training you want to view, in the Training Dates text boxes,
type the desired date range.
OR
To select the dates from a calendar, click the Calendar icons
and select the desired
dates.
4. To view more complete information about a particular record, click the corresponding
Training icon
7/19/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 115
The Documents Tab
The Documents tab can track any files that you want to upload and keep with this staff member’s
profile. Documents can be categories based on the categories set up for your service, which will
also determine which people can view each document.
To work with staff documents,
1. From the staff member’s profile, click Edit.
2. If necessary, click the Documents tab.
The Documents tab appears.
3. To view a document, click the name of the document.
4. To add a document,
a. In the Document section, click Browse.
The Upload File dialog box appears.
b. Navigate to and select the desired document to upload.
c. Click Open.
The file is selected.
d. In the Description text box, type any additional details about the document.
e. From the Category drop down menu, select the type of document you are
adding.
f. Click Upload.
The document is added to the staff member’s profile.
4.3 Viewing and Editing Staff Profile Information
Each staff member of a service who has access to the Fire Bridge or who may be included on a run form
should have a profile created in the system. This profile can keep track of contact employment and
contact information, certifications and training, and associations with the service or particular stations.
Staff profiles also give staff members a username and password to sign in to the Fire Bridge.
Viewing and Editing Basic Profile Information
Basic staff profiles include information about the staff member’s certifications, role and
associations within the service and contact information.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
2. Select the Staff tab.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 116
The View Staff Info page appears, with a list of all staff members in the system.
3. To view only certain staff members, use the Stations drop down list of the alphabet links
at the top of the page to filter staff by the station with which they are associated or by last
name.
4. To search for a particular staff member, in the Search Last Name text box, type the
desired last name and click Go.
5. After filtering, to view all staff members again, click All.
6. To view a particular staff member’s profile, click the hyperlinked name.
7. OPTIONAL: To edit the staff member’s profile,
a) Below the profile information, click Edit.
b) Click a tab to work with the fields in that tab.
c) Using the provided fields, change or add any desired information.
d) To save any changes, click OK.
To return to the staff profile without saving changes, click Cancel.
4.4 Adding Staff Profiles
Administrators can add staff profiles to allow new staff members to access the system or simply to keep
their information in the system.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
2. Select the Staff tab.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 117
The View Staff Info page appears, with a list of all staff members in the system.
3. Click Add Staff Member.
4. Using the provided fields in each tab, enter all desired profile information.
HINT: The first tab must be completed and saved before any other tabs can be used.
WARNING: Be sure to save each tab before moving on to a new tab to prevent information
from being lost.
5. To save the new profile, click OK.
To return to the list of staff, click Cancel.
4.5 Working With Shift Setup
In order to simplify data entry on run forms, administrators can set up shift information so that staff
members will automatically be associated with a particular vehicle during a particular time period. When
shifts are set up and maintained, information about staff members will be automatically entered in incident
reports for that time period once the associated vehicle is chosen. If multiple reports are created during
this time period, using shifts can make reporting much more efficient.
In order for information to be correctly entered on an incident report, shift information needs to be entered
into the system regularly with every shift change. If you do not change the information when a shift
changes, the previously entered staff members will be continually entered into new run forms.
NOTE: If your agency uses the Scheduler module, shift setup will be different.
Viewing and Editing Shift Setup
While all users are generally able to view the currently set up shifts (depending on permissions
for the service), only administrators can edit the shift setup.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 118
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Fire Shifts.
A list of all staff associated with each vehicle appears.
3. To view more information about a shift or edit a shift, click the vehicle for the desired shift.
The information about the shift appears.
4. OPTIONAL: To edit the information for the selected shift,
a. Using the provided fields, change any information.
NOTE: To add a new staff member to the shift, click Add Member and select
their name from the resulting drop down list. To remove a member from the shift,
click the Delete icon
beside their name.
b. When finished, to save the changes to the shift, click OK.
To return to the list of shifts without saving any changes, click Cancel.
Adding New Shifts
Administrators will need to create new shift information each time the staff changes for a shift in
order to keep the information entered on incident reports current and correct.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
The My Fire Department page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 119
2. Under the Modules tab, select Fire Shifts.
A list of all staff associated with each vehicle appears.
3. From below the list, click Add Crew.
4. In the Vehicle/Apparatus drop down menu, select the vehicle that this crew will be using
during this shift.
NOTE: Since the incident report will fill in the names of staff members based on which
vehicle is used, be sure to select the correct vehicle.
5. From the Personnel drop down menu, select the first staff member.
6. To add additional staff members, click Add Member and use the resulting drop down
menu to select the new crew member.
7. In the Status section, select whether this shift should be Active (can be selected from lists
and will automatically populate run forms at this time) or Inactive (information is stored
but this shift will not affect run forms or appear outside of the Setup Shifts page).
8. To save the shift, click OK.
To return to the list of shifts without saving the new information, click Cancel.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 120
CHAPTER 5
WORKING WITH INCIDENT INFORMATION
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 121
5.1 Chapter Overview
The primary purpose of Fire Bridge is to collect and analyze data about fire incidents. This chapter
explains how to create and view incident reports, view the history of incident reports and create specified
reports for analyzing incident data.
5.2 Completing Run Reports
You may be able to select which run form template you would like to use, depending on the setup of your
service. If your system provides you with multiple templates, talk with your service or state administrator
about what to use separate templates for, if you have access to multiple templates.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Incidents tab, click Add Run.
The Run Form Template Selection page appears.
3. Click the hyperlinked name of the template to use.
EXAMPLE: Select NFIRS Fire Incident Form.
The first page of the run form appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 122
4. In the NFIRS-1 Basic section, ensure that all information is correct and conforms to station
requirements.
5. In the Incident Location section, use the provided fields to enter information about the location.
HINT: If the location’s information is saved in the system, click Lookup Location to select the
location from a list. This will automatically add all information about the location into the run form
and allow the user to select persons involved who have been associated with the location.
6. In the Incident Type / Aid Given or Received section, use the provided fields to enter information
about the type of incident and any additional aid.
HINTS:
To look up a particular NFIRS incident type or action taken code, click the Look Up icons
beside each field and use the resulting window to find the desired code.
To search through a list of codes, from the top of the window, click List.
To access the most commonly used codes, from the top of the window, click Top #.
To have the system provide a list of possible codes while you type, click the Switch icon
.
In the Dates and Times section, enter all information about the dates and times of the incidents.
In the Actions Taken section, enter information about any actions taken on this run.
In the Shifts and Alarms section, enter any information about the shifts and alarms for this run.
In the Consumables Section, select what equipment was consumed in the incident.
In the Resources section, enter all information about any apparatuses and personnel resources
used.
12. In the Estimated Dollar Losses and Values section, enter any known information about original
and lost values.
13. In the Casualties section, enter all information about any deaths or injuries, as well as additional
information about the property related to casualties.
14. In the Detector/Hazardous Materials Release/Mixed Use Property/Property Use section, enter the
appropriate information.
HINTS:
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
To look up a particular NFIRS incident type or action taken code, click the Look Up icons
beside each field and use the resulting window to find the desired code.
To search through a list of codes, from the top of the window, click List.
To access the most commonly used codes, from the top of the window, click Top #.
To have the system provide a list of possible codes while you type, click the Switch icon
.
15. In the Narrative section, enter a narrative for the run report.
HINT: To check spelling in the narrative, click the Spell Check button.
16. To add another narrative, in the Additional Narratives section,
a. Click Add Additional Narrative.
The Additional Narrative window appears.
b. Type the information for the additional narrative.
c. When finished, click Save Additional Narrative.
17. In the Person/Entity Involved/Owner section, to enter a person,
a. Using the provided fields, enter all known information about the person.
HINTS:
To automatically enter city, county and state information from the zip code, enter the zip
code in the Postal Code text box and click the Update Now button. To look for certain
location information based on other information (e.g., to search for a zip code based on
city), click Lookup and search using the known information.
b. Click Save Person.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired people are entered.
18. In the Authorization section, enter information about the staff submitting the report.
19. Click Save.
The run report is generated, with each required NFIRS report appearing as a tab at the top of the
screen.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 123
20. As you finished each page, to save all information and remain on the same tab, click Save.
OR
To save all information on this tab and move on to the next tab, click Save & Continue.
HINTS:
No more tabs will be displayed until you save the first page.
If you save a tab, validity information will appear at the top of the page to notify you of any
missing information.
NOTE: The tabs for each form are coded to inform users about their status. All forms that
must be completed will be marked with an (R), meaning required, after the form title, while all
forms that are available but not required will be marked with an (O) meaning optional. Tabs that
have required information missing will be red, the tab currently displayed will be orange, and tabs
that have not been viewed will be blue.
Run Form Tabs
Run forms are laid out in tabs; each tab is equivalent to a page in a paper run form. You will see a
list of the tabs in your run form across the top of the page once you save the first page of the
form.
These tabs will be different depending on the information that is entered into the run form; for
instance, the tabs for structure fire information will only be displayed if you enter an incident type
related to a structure or building fire.
Basic
The Basic tab is the first tab of the run form, which provides the preliminary and
overview information about the call included in the NFIRS-1 Basic form. The
information entered on this tab will determine which additional tabs appear when this
run form is saved.
Fire
The Fire tab records the general fire information about this call that is included in the
NFIRS-2 Fire form. The information included in this tab can relate to any type of fire,
although for vegetation fires the Wildland Fire tab can be completed instead.
Structure Fire
The Structure Fire tab is specifically for structure fires, and will supplement the
information in the Fire tab.
Civilian Fire Casualty
The Civilian Fire Casualty tab details injuries and deaths to civilians and nonfire/EMS personnel related to the fire incident.
HINT: Non-fire related injuries and deaths are documented in the EMS tab.
Fire Service Casualty
The Fire Service Casualty tab reports injuries, deaths or exposure to chemicals and
toxic agents for firefighters.
EMS
The EMS module records any medical incidents for which the department provided
primary care, non-fire related injuries or deaths to civilians. This tab is not a patient
care report, but can be additional documentation.
Hazardous Materials
The Hazardous Materials tab is available to document spills of 55 gallons or more of
hazardous materials or calls where hazmat services were required.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 124
Wildland Fire
The Wildland Fire tab reports wildland or vegetation. This tab can be used instead of
the Fire tab.
Apparatus/Personnel
The Apparatus/Personnel tab combines the Apparatus or Resources module and the
Personnel module of NFIRS forms, collecting information about each apparatus used
for the incident, tracks personnel involved with the incident and calculates times.
Arson
The Arson tab is used to report additional information for fires that are intentionally
set.
Run Form Tools
The Fire Bridge run form provides you with some tools to make it easier for you to complete your
run forms.
 Lookup buttons allow you to search for and select information from a list.

Check to Populate checkboxes will automatically complete some information based on
what you have already filled in (e.g., completing the city and state information based on a
zip code).

AutoComplete buttons will cause the system to search for matching records as you type
(e.g., searching for a code matching the word or numbers you begin to type) whenever
the button is selected.

Help icons will provide additional information about the section when you place your
mouse over them without clicking.

Spell Check will run a spell checker on your narratives or other text fields with the feature,
Understanding Validity
Validity is a feature that will inform you of when you have left any required fields in the run form
incomplete. Based on the number of incomplete fields and the importance of those fields, your
run form will be assigned a validity score that will be displayed at the top of the page once you
save your run form. As you complete more fields, the score will go up.
There will be multiple visual clues throughout the run form as to where required fields have been
left blank.

7/19/2013
Each tab is color coded to indicate its status for validity. The orange tab is the one you
currently have open; blue tabs have all required fields completed and red tabs have
required fields that still need to be completed.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 125

At the top of each tab you will see a section detailing the current validity of this run form
and a list of the fields that still need to be filled in.

Within the run form, any incomplete field that is required will be displayed with red text
and a Warning icon.
When the run form is complete, the validity score will be at 100%, all tabs will be blue and there
will be no red fields or Warning icons.
5.3 Additional Run Form Options
Once the initial reporting is completed through the run form, additional documentation can be provided,
depending on the situation. These sections explain how to add the different forms of additional
documentation. Depending on your permissions, you may not be able to add all these forms of
documentation.
Be sure to complete the run form before adding additional types of documentation; some information is
often copied into the new documentation to prevent duplicate data entry. (For example, if you are adding
a report for an additional exposure, information about the staff and the way the fire was started will be
copied so you don’t need to enter that data twice.)
Adding Exposures to a Run Report
If additional exposures have occurred from an incident, additional exposure forms can be added
to the run report. These reports will be attached to the original incident report but will allow you to
record information specific to the new exposure.
1. From the existing run form to which the exposure form should be attached, from the run
form toolbar, click Form Options and Add Exposure.
2. In the New Exposure Number text box, type the number for this exposure.
NOTE: These numbers will differ depending on your service’s requirements.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 126
3. Click Add New Exposure To this Incident.
A new exposure form appears.
4. Using the provided fields, complete the exposure form for the new exposure.
Adding QA/QI Notes to a Run Report
Administrators can add notes to completed run reports with comments for the personnel included
in the incident. These notes can be attached the incident and sent to the inboxes of any
personnel included.
Most providers will not be able to add QA/QI notes to a run report; this feature is generally
reserved for medical directors and administrators.
1. From the existing run form to which the note will pertain, from the run form toolbar, click
Form Options and Add QA/QI Note.
The QA/QI Notes window appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
2. Click the New Message icon
A blank message appears.
P a g e | 127
.
3. From the Message Type drop down menu, select a category for the message.
HINT: Message types help to organize inboxes, making specific messages or
messages relating to a specific topic easier to find.
4. In the Subject text box, type a name for the message.
5. In the Message text box, type the body of the note.
NOTE: Information must be typed in the Message text box before the message can
be sent.
6. OPTIONAL: To narrow down the list of people displayed in the Service Staff section, use
the Permission Groups drop down menu or the checkbox(es) to specify criteria that users
should meet in order to show up in the Service Staff section.
HINT: This can make it easier for you to locate the people you want to receive this
message. To view all people again, you can click the Clear Filters button.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 128
7. In the Notify section, to add additional staff members who should receive this message in
their Fire Bridge inbox,
NOTES:
Staff already associated with the incident will be selected in the Staff Associated with this
Incident section.
Other staff for the service will be listed in the Service Staff scroll list. You can use the
fields in the Filters section to narrow down which staff should be displayed in the Service
Staff section.
System administrators will be listed in the Administrative Contacts section.
Multiple staff members can be selected from this section by pressing and holding Ctrl
while clicking each name.
A link to the incident report will also be included in the message.
a. To add staff from the service associated with this run form,
i.
From the Available scroll list for the Service Staff section, select the staff
members
ii.
Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple staff members can be selected from this section by
pressing and holding Ctrl while clicking each name.
b. To include an administrative contact for the system in this message,
i.
From the Available scroll list in the Administrative Contacts section,
select the desired name.
ii.
Click the Add icon
.
NOTE: Multiple names can be selected from this section by pressing
and holding Ctrl while clicking each name.
8. To send emails with the message to all selected staff at the email address listed in their
profile, select the Send an email in addition to the Inbox, if available checkbox.
9. To post the note, click Submit.
Adding Addendums
Run reports are locked after a specific amount of time to prevent additional changes from being
made. In the case that additional information must be added, however, you can attach a separate
file containing that information in an addendum. This file could be a Word or Excel document, or
any other document type preferred by the service.
1. From the run report to which the addendum should be added, from the run form toolbar,
click Form Options and Add Addendum.
The Incident Addendum window appears.
2. Click Add Addendum.
3. In the Description text box, type any additional important information about the
addendum.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 129
4. OPTIONAL: From the File section, type the path to the file or click Browse to locate and
select the file.
5. When finished, click Submit.
Adding Attachments
Additional files can assist with the complete documentation of incidents, including photographs or
scanned documents. System users can attach files to the run report.
1. From the run report to which the file should be attached, from the run form toolbar, click
Form Options and Add Attachment.
The Incident Attachments window appears.
2. Click Add Attachment.
3. Click Browse.
The File Upload dialog box appears.
4. Navigate to and select the desired file.
5. Click Open.
The file is selected and the Choose File dialog box closes.
6. When finished, click Submit.
The file is added as an attachment.
Adding a Hazmat Operations and Billing Packet
A hazmat operations and billing packet is the group of forms that you need to complete for any
incidents with hazmat. You must fill in and save all information you know in the run form before
you add a hazmat operations and billing packet.
1. From the toolbar at the top of the NFIRS form, hover your mouse over the Form Options
option.
A sub-menu appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 130
2. From the menu, click View Hazmat Packet.
The Hazmat Packet page appears, with a list of each form that need to be completed.
3. For the desired form, from the Actions column, click the corresponding Start link.
The first form appears.
4. Using the provided fields, complete any desired information.
HINT: Some information will already be completed based on the information in your
NFIRS form, which avoids duplicate data entry.
5. When finished, at the bottom of the page, click Save and Continue.
You are returned to the Hazmat Packet page.
6. Repeat steps 3–5 until all desired forms are completed.
5.4 Viewing and Editing Past Run Reports
System users can view and search through any run reports that they have created on or uploaded to the
Fire Bridge system. Based on their level of permissions, some system users may be able to view run
reports submitted by other users within their service. Within the time frame set by the user’s service,
these run forms may be altered to contain more complete or correct information, but after this time frame
the user will only be able to view the static report.
You can search for past run reports either from the Incident List or the Run History page, depending on
your preference. The Incident List offers several improved features including the ability to save search
criteria in a view and improved search speed, while the Run History page offers a familiar interface for
those who may have worked with it in past versions of Fire Bridge.
Working with the Incident List
The Incident List feature is a new view allowing you to search, view and filter your incident forms
to find the ones you are looking for. The Incident List provides several additional tools for finding
incidents, as well as a faster load time.
Overview of Incident List Options
The Incident List page provides you with a collection of tools you can use to find the
appropriate incident(s) in your system.
Views allow you to create a set of criteria that incidents must meet in order to be
displayed when that view is applied and also to customize which columns you see. You
can save a view and use it again any time that you view the incident list.
The search options allow you to either search for an incident exactly matching
everything you type in the search box (when the Exact Match checkbox is selected) or for
any incidents that contain what you typed in the Search box, even if they also contain
additional information (e.g., if you type “”Lake,” you could see results for Lakeville and
Lake City). The filters options allow you to enter more specific search criteria.
You also have the option to select how often the page will refresh to display new
incidents meeting your view and search criteria.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 131
The Quick Action menu available for each incident allows you to quickly perform an
action for that incident (e.g., to quickly view the history or view the report).
Searching for Incidents from the Incident List
In order to search for incidents, you can use any of the tools available from the Incident
List page.
1. If necessary, in the upper right, click My Fire Department.
The home page for your agency appears.
2. Under the Incidents tab, select Incident List.
The Incident List page appears.
3. To apply a view to determine which incidents appear, from the View drop down
menu, select the appropriate view.
NOTE: The Default View option will provide the same view options as the
default view of the Run History page did previously.
The page refreshes to display the information set up in that view.
4. To perform a basic search,
a. In the Search text box, type your search terms.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 132
HINT: The Search text box will search different options based on the
columns that are displayed for the view you are using. For more
information about which columns will be searched, click the Help icon to
the right of the Search text box.
b. To set the search up to return only incidents that match your entire entry
in the search text box (e.g., entering Lake City would return only
incidents with Lake City, not incidents with Lakeville or Lake of the
Woods, because it is searching only for values that include the full text of
Lake City), select the Exact Match checkbox.
OR
To set the search up to return incidents that include your search terms
(e.g., entering Lake City would return Lake City, Lakeville and Lake of
the Woods, because it is searching for either Lake OR City), deselect the
Exact Match checkbox.
NOTE: This Exact Search option applies only to the Search text box,
not to the filters or additional search options covered in later steps.
c. Click Go.
The page is narrowed down to display only incidents matching your
search.
5. To search based on date,
a. In the Date Range text boxes, type the first and the last date you want to
view incidents within.
OR
To select the date from a calendar, click the Calendar icon
select the desired date.
OR
To avoid setting a start or end date for the search, leave the
corresponding text box blank.
b. Click Go.
and
NOTE: If you have also entered other search criteria, you will see
only incidents that match both those search criteria and the date criteria
set here.
6. To perform an advanced search,
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 133
a. From the right of the Search text box, click the Filters link.
Additional search filters are displayed.
b. Enter any search criteria in the new search fields.
c.
NOTE: Some filters have drop down menus that allow you to select
how you want your search terms to match the criteria you enter; for
example, you could say that you want the incidents with validity scores
less than, greater than or equal to a certain number. If there is not a drop
down menu to select this kind of information, the search will
automatically look for values that contain the full text of your entry. So,
searching for 12345 would bring back 12345, 012345 and 123456, but
not 123 45 or 123645.
When finished, click Go.
NOTE: If you have also entered other search criteria, you will see
only incidents that match both those search criteria and the advanced
search criteria set here.
7. OPTIONAL: At any time, to clear your existing search and return to the default
view, click Clear.
8. To open an incident, click on any of the blue links for that incident.
9. To view a report for an incident,
a. Click the Quick Actions icon for the report.
A drop down menu appears.
b. Click Report.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 134
If prompted, enter a reason for viewing the report and click Submit.
The report appears.
10. To view the audit trail history of this report,
a. Click the Quick Actions icon for the report.
A drop down menu appears.
b. Click History.
The Incident History window appears.
Setting the Refresh Frequency
You can select how often you want the Incident List page to automatically refresh to find
new incidents.
1. If necessary, in the upper right, click or My Fire Department.
The home page for your agency appears.
2. Under the Incidents tab, select Incident List.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 135
The Incident List page appears.
3. From the upper right, from the Refresh drop down menu, select how often you
want the page to automatically refresh.
Creating a View
Views allow you to create a set of criteria that incidents must meet in order to be
displayed when that view is applied and also to customize which columns you see. You
can create and save your own custom views that you can apply at any time when you’re
working with the incident list.
There are four different types of views: system views, service views, my views and the
default view. Your ability to create and edit views is based on permissions. Users will only
be able to create and edit views if they have the correct level of access to the Incident
List page, and may be able to view only certain types of views based on their
permissions.
System views are set up at the system level and only system administrators will be able
to edit them, although everyone can view them.
Service views are set up for a specific service by service administrators. Only service
administrators will be able to edit these views, although anyone in that service can view
them.
My views are created by you and can be edited by you at any time. Only you will be able
to use and edit your views.
The default view includes all the columns that were included in the default view for the
previous Run History page. You will not be able to edit this view, although you can use it
to view the incident list at any time.
1. If necessary, in the upper right, click or My Fire Department.
The home page for your agency appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 136
2. Under the Incidents tab, select Incident List.
The Incident List page appears.
3. From the right side of the View drop down menu, click Add.
The View Details page appears.
4. In the Name text box, type the name for this view.
NOTE: This name is what you will see and select from the View drop down
menu when you want to use this view again.
5. In the Description text box, type any additional descriptive details you want to
save with this view.
NOTE: This description will only be visible if someone opens this view for
editing.
6. To set up an additional column of information to display on the incident list,
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 137
a. Click Add Column.
A new line appears.
b. From the Column drop down menu, select the field that you want to
appear for this column.
c. OPTIONAL: To change the text that will appear in the column header, in
the Header text box, type the desired header.
d. From the Align drop down menu, select the way you want the text in this
column aligned.
e. If you want to change the formatting for the way the information appears,
from the Format drop down menu, select the desired formatting.
f.
HINT: This option will not be available for all columns. It will most
commonly be used for dates; you could choose to display the date as
3/21/2013 or March 21, 2013.
If you have multiple columns, to move this one up or down in the order of
where it will appear on the page, click the Up or Down button, as
needed.
HINT: If you drag the column to a new position, make sure that you
do not click within a field; clicking within a field will open that field for
editing rather than selecting the field to move.
OR
Click within the row for a column and drag it to the desired position in the
list.
7. To add additional filters to the page that you can use for advanced searches,
a. In the Filters section, from the Available scroll list, select the first filter to
add.
b. Click the Add icon
.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired filters are added.
8. To set up criteria that will narrow down the incidents listed on this page, in the
Criteria section,
a. To group multiple pieces of criteria, from the first drop down menu, select
the opening parenthesis.
HINTS:
You generally only need to use parentheses if you will be creating
multiple criteria where some are linked together with And (e.g., criteria A
AND criteria B must be met) and others are linked together with Or (e.g.,
criteria C OR criteria D must be met).
It may be easier for you to add parentheses at the end, once you have
set up all your criteria already.
If you want to enter multiple criteria, think of them like a math equation.
Criteria will be applied in order unless parentheses are applied to group
some of them together.
b. From the Field drop down menu, select which field the criteria will be
examining (e.g., Status).
c. From the Operator drop down menu, select what is required of the
selected value for the criteria to be met (e.g., is, is before, begins with).
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 138
d. From the Value drop down menu, select the option that the field should
be compared against (e.g., In Progress).
The first criteria is complete.
e. To add an additional piece of criteria, click the Add icon .
f. To determine how this piece of criteria relates to the others, from the
And/Or drop down menu, select And (i.e., this all pieces of criteria must
be met for a record to display) or Or (i.e., one of the pieces of criteria
must be met for a record to display).
NOTE: If using parenthesis to group criteria, note that the And and Or
options will only be applied within the parentheses. If the option is
applied to a single piece of criteria outside a group, it will act upon the
individual piece of criteria and the group as a whole.
g. Repeat steps a–f until all desired criteria are set.
h. When finished with a group, from the last drop down menu, select the
closed parenthesis.
9. When finished with all criteria, click Save.
The Create View For window appears.
10. From the drop down menu, select the type of view you are creating.
NOTE: Depending on your permissions, you may not be able to create all
these types of views.
System Views
System views are available for all services in the system and can
only be created or edited by individuals with system administratorlevel permissions. All other users will be able to apply system views
when looking at the incident list but will not be able to make any
changes.
Service Views
Service views are available for the service the view is created in and
can only be created or edited by individuals with service
administrator-level permissions. All other users will be able to apply
service views when looking at the incident list for that service but will
not be able to make any changes.
My View
A view that is saved as a My View will be available only for you. You
can use this kind of view to view the incident and you will be able to
edit it at any time, but no one else will be able to access it.
11. Click Save.
The new view is created.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 139
Keyboard Shortcuts for the Incident List
Keyboard shortcuts allow you to quickly perform an action within the incident list by
pressing certain keys on your keyboard.
Keyboard Shortcut
Action
Enter
Refreshes the page and keeps your current search and filter
options applied
Esc
Refreshes the page and clears any current search and filter
options
 (right arrow)
Opens the next page of results on the incident list
 (left arrow)
Opens the previous page of results on the incident list
Working with Run History
Runs that are locked to prevent further editing will displayed a Locked icon
status set to Completed.
and will have their
To view past run reports:
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Incidents tab, select Run History.
The Search Run History page appears.
3. Using the provided fields, enter all criteria to narrow down the reports that should be
displayed.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 140
HINT: To display all runs entered by the signed-in user, make sure that the Incident
Date text boxes display appropriate dates and that all other fields are empty of criteria.
4. To search by more specific criteria,
a. Click Advanced Search.
The Advanced Search Criteria section appears.
b. In the Advanced Search Criteria section, enter all additional search terms.
5. When finished, to display a list of all run reports created by the signed-in user matching
the set criteria, click Search.
The search results are displayed.
6. To temporarily show only certain results within the list, use the drop down menus at the
top of the window to select the criteria by which to filter.
7. To sort the results by a particular heading, click the desired heading. To reverse the order
that the records are sorted by (e.g., to switch from sorting A–Z to sorting Z–A), click the
heading again.
8. To view a particular record, click the any of the linked text in that record.
9. OPTIONAL: To edit the record,
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
a.
b.
c.
d.
P a g e | 141
Using the tabs on the top of the run form, navigate to the page with the
information to be changed.
Using the provided fields, change any desired information.
Before closing that tab, click Save/Submit Form.
Repeat steps a–c until all desired changes have been made.
Editing the Run History Display Options
The columns that display information about the records on the Run History page can be
configured to display the information most relevant to your needs. As each configuration
option is set, a preview will appear at the bottom of the page for the new configuration.
1. From the Run History page, click the Customize Run History Page link.
The User Customizable Run History Page appears.
2. To select a new column to be displayed, from the Add New Column section, from
the first drop down menu, select the desired column.
3. From the second drop down menu, select where the new column should be
added to the page in relation to the existing columns.
4. Click OK.
The Setup Columns table appears.
5. To change the text at the top of the column, in the Column column, type the new
text.
6. To set a column as the first column that records will be sorted by, select the
corresponding Primary Sort option and select the desired sort order.
7. To set a column as the second column that records will be sorted by, select the
corresponding Secondary Sort option and select the desired sort order.
8. When finished, click OK.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 142
Working with Run History Results
The Run History report contains basic information about the displayed run. Clicking on
the color-coded Validity
icon, incident number, call number, or PCR number will
open the corresponding Patient Care Report.
Each run report listed in the search results will show the incident
report’s validity with both a percentage and a color. A validity
index, which defines the validity associated with each color, can
be found at the bottom of the Run History screen. These colors
provide an at-a-glance method to determine the validity of run
reports.
The Actions column contains icons to inform users of all
additional documentation related to the run report. The icon
index at the bottom of the run history page defines the
actions column. If a call has an addendum, QA/QI note,
active protocol, documented validity reason or attachment
associated with it, the appropriate column will be displayed in
the corresponding row for the call record. All calls will have a
Run Report icon and a History icon associated with them.
Clicking the History icon
will bring up the history audit
trail for this run report. This will display a record of all
personnel who accessed the report based on their login information and document any
information that was changed.
1. The template is switched and the run form opens.
5.5 Updating Multiple Runs
Fire Bridge allows you to perform several different actions on multiple runs at the same time either from
the results of a run history search or from the Incident List. Your ability to perform each of these actions is
based on your level of permissions.
Printing Multiple Runs
The Batch Print option allows you to generate a PDF file containing a report for multiple runs at
the same time, rather than opening each PDF individually. This PDF file can then be easily
printed based on your printer settings. This option will generate the same report for each selected
run in the PDF file.
1. From the results of your run history search or the Incident List, select the checkbox(es)
for all runs that you want to print.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 143
2. From the Choose Bulk Action drop down menu, select Batch Print.
Another drop down menu appears.
3. Select the PDF report that you want to generate.
4. Click Go.
A new window or tab opens with a PDF file containing the selected report for all selected
runs.
NOTE: Depending on the setup of your system, you may be prompted to enter a
reason for working with multiple runs. If a prompt appears, enter your reason and click
Submit.
Updating the Status of Multiple Runs
Based on your permissions, you may be able to update the status of multiple runs at the same
time from the list of runs available once you search run history.
1. From the results of your run history search or the Incident List, select the checkbox(es)
for all runs that you want to update the status for.
2. From the Choose Bulk Action drop down menu, select Update Status.
Another drop down menu appears.
3. From the second drop down menu, select the new status to apply to the selected run
forms.
4. Click Go.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Click OK.
The status of the selected runs is updated.
NOTE: Depending on the setup of your system, you may be prompted to enter a
reason for working with multiple runs. If a prompt appears, enter your reason and click
Submit.
Locking and Unlocking Multiple Runs
You can update multiple runs to be either locked or unlocked from the results of a run history
search.
1. From the results of your run history search or the Incident List, select the checkbox(es)
for all runs that you want to lock or unlock.
2. From the Choose Bulk Action drop down menu, select Lock Runs or Unlock Runs, as
appropriate.
3. Click Go.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Click OK.
The selected runs are locked or unlocked, as appropriate.
NOTE: Depending on the setup of your system, you may be prompted to enter a
reason for working with multiple runs. If a prompt appears, enter your reason and click
Submit.
5.6 Accessing Pre-Created Service Reports
The Fire Bridge has several common reports easily available that all system users can request for more
information about the collected data. These reports have defined the information that will appear in the
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 144
report, but take the data from the run reports entered into the Fire Bridge by your service. Additional
reports are available from the Report Writer. For more information about the Report Writer, please refer to
the Report Writer chapter.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Reports.
The Service Reports page appears.
3. From the Reports page, click the name of the desired report.
If any additional information is needed to specify the data in the report, a new page will appear
with empty fields.
4. To further specify the report data, use the provided fields to enter the correct criteria and click
Continue.
The new report appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 145
CHAPTER 6
COMMUNICATING WITH THE FIRE BRIDGE
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 146
6.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how administrators can communicate with other staff who use the Fire Bridge by
sending messages, can place documents in the Fire Bridge that other system users can access and
reference at any time and create a centralized calendar and schedule with everyone’s appointments.
6.2 Viewing Messages in the Inbox
The Inbox is how users obtain, respond and write messages pertaining to specific incidents or to
communicate with other members of the service, medical direction or other system users. Message status
is maintained within the system to verify when messages are sent, replied to and read. Messages can be
stored in the inbox for later reference. When unread messages are present in the inbox, a notification will
appear on the top toolbar and on the Inbox link in the left menu.
1.
From the top right, click the number link
The Inbox page appears.
NOTE: This number will change based on the number of unread messages in your inbox.
2. To view read messages, unread messages or both, from the View drop down menu, select the
desired type of messages to display in the inbox.
3. To view a different number of records per page, from the Records drop down list, select the
desired number of records.
4. To go directly to a page of records, from the Go to Page section at the bottom left, click the
desired page number.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 147
5. To view a particular note, click the linked subject text or the corresponding folder icon
The appropriate note appears.
.
6. To view a PDF file of the report to which this note pertains, from the Associated Run Report
Options section, click View PDF
.
7. To view the online form of the report to which this note pertains, from the Associated Run Report
Options section, click View Run Form
.
8. To return to the list of messages, click List of Message
.
6.3 Replying to Messages in the Inbox
To share additional information with the sender of a note, users can use the inbox to reply to notes that
they have received.
1. From the top right, click the number link
The Inbox page appears.
NOTE: This number will change based on the number of unread messages in your inbox.
2. Open the note to which you want to reply.
NOTE: For more information about viewing notes, please refer to the above Viewing Notes in
the Inbox section.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 148
3. From the bottom of the page, click Reply This Message
.
4. In the Message text field, type all desired text for the note.
5. OPTIONAL: To send a copy of this note to additional people,
a. OPTIONAL: To narrow down the list of people displayed in the Service Staff section, use
the Permission Groups drop down menu or the checkbox(es) to specify criteria that users
should meet in order to show up in the Service Staff section.
HINT: This can make it easier for you to locate the people you want to receive this
message. To view all people again, you can click the Clear Filters button.
b. In the Service Staff section, select the names of all staff to receive the message.
HINT: To select more than one person, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each name.
c. Click the Add icon
.
d. In the Administrative Contacts section, select the names of all system administrators to
receive this message.
HINT: To select more than one person, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each name.
e. Click the Add icon
.
5. To send the note, click Submit.
To clear all text in the note, click Reset.
To return to the original note without saving any changes, click <<Back.
6.4 Sending New Messages
Users can send new notes to other system users.
1. From the top right, click the number link
The Inbox page appears.
NOTE: This number will change based on the number of unread messages in your inbox.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
2. From below the list of messages, click New Message
3.
4.
5.
6.
7/19/2013
P a g e | 149
.
From the Message Type drop down menu, select the desired category for this message.
In the Subject text box, type a title for the note.
In the Message text field, type the note.
To select people to receive this message,
a. OPTIONAL: To narrow down the list of people displayed in the Service Staff section, use
the Permission Groups drop down menu or the checkbox(es) to specify criteria that users
should meet in order to show up in the Service Staff section.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 150
HINT: This can make it easier for you to locate the people you want to receive this
message. To view all people again, you can click the Clear Filters button.
b. In the Service Staff section, select the names of all staff to receive the message.
HINT: To select more than one person, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each name.
c. Click the Add icon
.
d. In the Administrative Contacts section, select the names of all system administrators to
receive this message.
HINT: To select more than one person, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each name.
e. Click the Add icon
.
7. To send a copy of the message to the email address in each recipient’s profile as well as to their
Fire Bridge inbox, select the Send an email in addition to the Inbox, if available checkbox.
8. When finished, to send the note, click Submit.
To clear all text of the note, click Reset.
To return to the list of received notes, click <<Back.
6.5 Flagging Messages for Follow Up
You can flag messages to remind yourself to follow up, if needed. Messages with white flags are not
flagged for follow up; messages with red flags are.
1. From the top right, click the number link
The Inbox page appears.
NOTE: This number will change based on the number of unread messages in your inbox.
2. To flag a single message, in the Follow-Up column, click the Flag icon
for the message you
want to flag.
3. To flag multiple messages,
a. Select the checkbox for each message to flag.
b. From the Select an action for checked messages drop down menu, select Flag for Follow
Up.
4. To clear a flag on a single message, in the Follow-Up column, click a red Flag icon
message to be de-flagged.
5. To clear a flag on multiple messages,
7/19/2013
for the
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 151
a. Select the checkbox for each message for which to clear the flag.
b. From the Select an action for checked messages drop down menu, select Clear Flag.
6.6 Deleting Messages
System users can delete messages that they no longer need from their inbox. You can delete single or
multiple messages.
1. From the top right, click the number link
The Inbox page appears.
NOTE: This number will change based on the number of unread messages in your inbox.
2. To delete a single message,
a. For the appropriate message, click the Delete icon
.
A confirmation page appears.
b. To delete the message, click Yes.
To save the message, click No.
3. To delete multiple messages,
a. For the desired messages, select the checkboxes.
b. From the Select an action for checked messages drop down menu, select Delete
Checked.
6.7 Submitting Feedback to ImageTrend
Based on your permissions, you may have access to User Voice, which will allow you to submit ideas to
ImageTrend and vote on which existing suggestions you think are a good idea.
Guidelines
User Voice is an open user forum and we ask that you follow certain guidelines to help
ImageTrend and others respond to your feedback, as well as to maintain a community of respect
among other users of ImageTrend products.


7/19/2013
Be as clear and specific as possible.
Limit one suggestion per entry.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE



P a g e | 152
Only add new and unique ideas. If you see a similar idea but have additional
suggestions, add that as a comment to the original post.
Vote for suggestions based on your need or interest in the enhancement becoming a part
of the product.
Be respectful and courteous to others. If you disagree with an idea, offer constructive
suggestions or simply do not vote for it.
Submitting a New Idea
You can submit new ideas for ImageTrend products through User Voice.
1. From the top left, click User Voice.
The User Voice page opens in a new tab or window.
HINT: You may have to click the More link in order to see the User Voice link.
2. In the Enter your idea text box, type a name for your suggestion.
As you type, if any existing ideas use similar words to those you are typing, they appear
below the text box.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 153
NOTE: If no suggested ideas come up, skip to step 4.
3. If any of these suggested ideas are the same as the idea you were going to enter, vote
for them or add comments as needed with additional information.
HINT: For more information about voting or adding comments, please refer to the
Voting for an Idea or Commenting on an Idea sections in this manual.
OR
To add a new idea, click Post a new idea…
Additional fields appear to allow you to enter your idea.
4. OPTIONAL: To assign this idea to a category, from the Category drop down menu,
select the desired category.
NOTE: You do not need to assign a category, but it can make it easier for other users
to find your idea.
5. In the Describe your idea… text box, type any additional detail you want to include about
your idea.
6. OPTIONAL: To attach a file related to your idea,
a. In the Describe your idea… text box, click Attach a File.
b. Click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
c. Navigate to and select the desired file.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 154
d. Click Open.
The file is selected for attaching to your idea.
7. Click the number of votes you want to give for this idea.
NOTE: You must vote for your own idea at least once.
8. When finished entering your idea, click Post Idea..
The idea is entered onto the User Voice forum.
Voting for an Idea
If you see an idea in the User Voice forum that you like, you can vote for that idea up to 3 times.
Voting for an idea lets ImageTrend see how many people are interested in having a specific idea
or feature developed. While this does not guarantee that a specific feature will be developed at
any specific time, it does provide a way for you to easily give feedback on your Fire Bridge and its
features.
Keep in mind that you have a total of 15 votes to use. If an idea is developed and so is removed
from the forum, you will get your votes back. In addition, you can always remove votes from an
idea if you run out of votes and would prefer to vote for a different idea.
1. From the top left, click User Voice.
The User Voice page opens in a new tab or window.
HINT: You may have to click the More link in order to see the User Voice link.
2. Find the idea that you want to vote for.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 155
3. On the left side, below the number of votes, click Vote.
A pop up appears with buttons to vote.
4. Click the number of votes you want to give to this idea.
Your votes are recorded.
5. To close the pop up, click anywhere on the page outside of it.
Removing Votes for an Idea
You can remove votes for an idea that you have votes for at any time. This may happen
most often if you’ve already used all your votes but want to vote for a new idea. You can
either remove all your votes for a particular idea or just use fewer votes.
1. From the top left, click User Voice.
The User Voice page opens in a new tab or window.
HINT: You may have to click the More link in order to see the User Voice link.
2. Locate the idea you want to remove votes from.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 156
3. Click the Votes button.
HINT: Any idea you have votes for will display the number of times you voted
for it on the Vote button.
The voting pop up appears.
4. To enter a different number of votes, click the appropriate number of votes.
OR
To remove all your votes for this idea, click the Remove Votes link on the right
side of the pop up.
Your votes are adjusted.
5. To close the pop up, click anywhere on the page outside of it.
Commenting on an Idea
At times, you may want to add a comment to an idea. This might be to expand on another
person’s idea that you agree with, ask a question or give an example of how your agency might
use this feature. You can add comments on to any existing idea.
1. From the top left, click User Voice.
The User Voice page opens in a new tab or window.
HINT: You may have to click the More link in order to see the User Voice link.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 157
2. Find the idea that you want to add a comment for.
3. Click the name of the idea or the associated Comments link.
The idea opens.
4. In the Add a comment… text box at the bottom of the page, type your comment.
5. Click Post comment.
The comment is added to the idea and will be visible to everyone looking at this idea in
User Voice.
6.8 Viewing Documents
The Fire Bridge can contain documents and website links to be accessed and used as resources.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Documents.
The Document Resource Center page appears.
3. To view a particular resource, from the list of documents, click the name of the desired document.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 158
6.9 Editing Document Information
Administrators can change the title of a document and the information that appears when a system user
rests his or her mouse above the title without clicking.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Documents.
The Document Resource Center page appears.
3. From the list of documents, click the correct Edit button.
The Edit Upload Document screen appears.
4. To change the title, in the Short Description text box, type the new title.
5. To set this document up to display for easy selection in the Attachments window of a run form, in
the Display in Incident Attachments section, select Yes.
6. To save the information, click OK.
To return to the list of documents without saving the changes, click Back.
NOTE: Additional sections may be present depending on the document type.
6.10 Adding New Documents
Administrators can upload new documents to the Fire Bridge system for other system users to access.
Documents in this section can include protocols, reference guides or reports that all system users should
be able to access.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Documents.
The Document Resource Center page appears.
3. From the (Service Name) Document Resource Center table, click Add Document.
4. In the Choose Document Type table, select the type of document you will be created.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
5.
6.
7.
8.
P a g e | 159
NOTE: Type-In provides a text editor for administrators to type the document information into.
Upload allows administrators to place a copy of a document (such as a Word or Excel file) in the
Fire Bridge. URL provides a link that users can click to open a Web page.
Click Submit.
For a type-in document,
a. In the Short Description text box, type the name of the document.
b. Click OK.
A text box appears.
c. Type your information into the text box.
d. When finished, click Save.
The type-in document is saved.
For uploaded documents,
a. In the Short Description text box, type the name of the document.
b. In the Path section, click Browse.
The Upload File dialog box appears.
c. Navigate to and select the file to upload.
d. Click Open.
The file is selected and the Choose File dialog box closes.
e. To set this document up to display for easy selection in the Attachments window of a run
form, in the Display in Incident Attachments section, select Yes.
f. Click OK.
The document is uploaded.
For URLs,
a. In the Short Description text box, type the name of the link as it should appear on the
Documents page.
b. In the URL of WebSite text box, type or paste the URL.
c. Click OK.
The URL is added to the document list.
6.11 Deleting Documents
Administrators with the correct permissions can remove documents from the document list.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Documents.
The Document Resource Center page appears.
3. From the list of documents, click the correct Edit button.
The Edit Upload Document screen appears.
4. Click Delete.
The document is deleted.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 160
CHAPTER 7
WORKING WITH LOCATIONS AND OCCUPANTS
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 161
7.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains the purpose and use of location, organization and occupant profiles. Administrators
can view, add, delete and edit these profiles, which can then be used to simplify data entry on incident
reports and inspection reports.
7.2 Overview of Location, Organization and Occupant
Profiles
The Fire Bridge allows for the creation of location, organization and occupant profiles to simplify data
entry for inspections and incidents. These profiles contain a variety of information that can be referenced
at any time or can reduce data entry on incident and inspection reports.
If location profiles are set up within the Fire Bridge system, they provide a central location for information
about a particular site. This can be accessed during an incident to provide contact information for involved
persons, information about dangerous materials on site and layout information. These locations can be
selected from an NFIRS report, which will automatically fill in any information that has been added to the
location profile. In addition, information from inspections or past incidents can be stored with the location
profile in order to keep a record of any ongoing issues the site may have.
Locations can be associated with a larger organization (e.g., associating all apartment buildings owned by
a particular landlord to track possible issues), with a particular zone (e.g., to keep track of which station is
responsible for the location), and with tenants currently using the location. Each location can have lists of
important information about the site, including the location of gas mains or fire hydrants, reports from
previous incidents, and dangerous on-site materials.
Organization profiles contain information about a single entity that may occupy several locations. This
could include a landlord with several properties or a university with multiple buildings. Organization
profiles may also include contact information or an address for a main office. The primary purpose of
organization profiles is to allow services to keep track of locations that may be connected by a common
owner, manager or corporate identity. Each location profile may be linked to an organization profile if
desired.
Occupant profiles contain information about the tenants of a location, including contact information and
records of any inspections or incidents related to the tenant. Occupants are associated with locations,
which can keep profiles for both current and past occupants. Occupant profiles are important if the Fire
Bridge is used to keep track of inspections. Inspections are performed on occupants and thus will be
associated with occupant profiles rather than location or organization profiles.
7.3 Viewing Location Information
Each location that has already been set up in the system should contain information about the site. Users
can view this site information, which may be useful in learning about the site in case of an incident.
Administrators can also edit information for the location to keep the profile updated.
The location profile can be navigated using the toolbar that will appear at the top of the page. This allows
system users to view a basic overview of information about the site, a list of previous fire incidents,
information about current and former occupants of the location, information about any materials of interest
on the premises, maps of the location and of fire hydrants, and any documents relating to the location that
have been uploaded.
1.
7/19/2013
From the top left, click My Fire Department.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 162
2.
Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
A list of locations appears.
3.
To sort the list by specific criteria to better find a particular location, above the list of locations,
use the drop down menus and the text box to enter the desired search terms.
To open a particular record, click the linked location number of location name.
The Location Profile page appears.
4.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
5.
P a g e | 163
Using the toolbar at the top of the page and the links available in each page, navigate to the
desired information.
Search Locations
Brings the user back to the list of locations.
Location Info
Provides an overview of information about the location, including basic building
information, contact and location information, and a list of reports from past fire
incidents.
Occupants
Each location should have occupants, which are the companies or groups that use
the site. Users can use this link to add new occupants to a location or view
information about current and past occupants.
Pre-Plan Info
Provides any information that may be useful in case of an incident at the location.
This can include a specific action plan, information about hazardous materials or
other materials of interest, location information for fire hydrants, and a map.
Documents
Relevant documents (e.g., floor plans, specialized maps) can be uploaded and
associated with a location.
7.4 Adding Locations
Administrators can create new location profiles to ensure the list is complete. Initially, the application will
prompt administrators to add basic information about the location. Once this information is saved,
administrators can return to the profile and edit it to add occupants, pre-plan information or documents.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
A list of locations appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 164
3. From below the list of locations, click Add Location.
The Add Location page appears.
4. Using the provided fields, enter the basic location and identification information about the
location.
5. Click Add.
If you chose to automatically generate an occupant profile for this location, a confirmation dialog
box appears.
6. If prompted, to create the occupant record, click OK.
The location and occupant record(s) are created, and the Location Profile page appears.
7. Using the provided links from the Location Profile page and the toolbar, edit the profile to contain
all desired information.
HINT: For more information, please refer to Editing Location Profiles.
7.5 Editing Location Profiles
Administrators can edit location profiles to update information or to complete the profile of a new location.
Location profiles contain many different aspects that can all be edited individually. In addition,
administrators can add or edit occupant profiles, pre-plan information or documents that are associated
with this location profile.
To open a location profile for editing:
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
From the list of locations, click the name of the location to edit.
3. Using the provided links from the Location Profile page and the toolbar, edit the desired
information.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 165
Editing Basic Location Information
Basic location information is available from the main Location Profile page. This information
includes address and GPS position, contact information, identification information and any
desired comments about the location.
1. If the Location Profile page is not currently displayed, from the toolbar, click Location Info.
2. From the Location Information section, click Edit Location.
3. From the resulting page, click Edit.
4. Using the provided fields, change or add any information.
5. Click OK.
Editing Building Information
Information about the building at the location is available from the main Location Profile page.
This includes information about the type, use and size of the building as well as about the fire
detector and extinguishing systems in place.
7/19/2013
1.
If the Location Profile page is not currently displayed, from the toolbar, click Location Info.
2.
From the Building Information section, click Edit Building.
3.
4.
5.
From the resulting page, click Edit.
Using the provided fields, change or add any information.
Click OK.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 166
Adding Location Contacts
Information about contact persons for the location is available from the main Location Profile
page.
1.
If the Location Profile page is not currently displayed, from the toolbar, click Location Info.
2.
From the Location Contacts section near the bottom of the page, click Add Location
Contact.
The Lookup Contacts window appears.
3.
7/19/2013
To associate a contact already existing in the system with this location,
a. Locate the desired contact.
b. Click the contact’s name.
The contact is added
OR
To add a new contact to the system,
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 167
a. Click Create New Contact.
The Add Contact page appears.
b. In the Contact Name section, enter this contact’s name.
c. In the Business Name text box, type the name of the business or organization
this contact is with.
d. In the Street Address, Apt/Suite and/or P.O. Box fields, enter the contact’s
address.
e. From the Favorite Location drop down menu, select the appropriate city, county
and state.
OR
i.
In the Postal Code text box, type the zip code.
ii.
Click Update Now.
f. In the E-mail text box, type this contact’s email address.
g. In the Active Status section, select whether this contact should be active and
visible to all users or inactive and only visible to administrators within this section.
h. In the Phone Numbers section, enter all known phone numbers for this contact.
i. In the Miscellaneous Information section, enter all additional information about
this contact.
j. If your agency uses contact groups, in the Contact Groups section, select all
groups that this contact should be included in.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
k.
l.
P a g e | 168
HINT: To select multiple groups, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking
each desired group.
In the Notes section, type any additional information.
Click OK.
The contact is added to the system and associated with the location.
Editing Location Contacts
Information about contact persons for the location is available from the main Location Profile
page. Administrators can edit information about existing contact persons.
1. If the Location Profile page is not currently displayed, from the toolbar, click Location Info.
2. From the Location Contacts section, click the name of the contact person to edit.
An overview of the contact’s information appears.
3. Click Edit.
4. Using the provided fields, change or add all desired information about this contact
person.
5. Click OK.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 169
Updating Contact Order
If there are multiple contacts for a location, you can change the order in which they should be
listed and contacted.
1. If the Location Profile page is not displayed in the location’s profile, from the toolbar, click
Location Info.
2. From the Location Contacts section, from the right side of the header, click Edit Contact
Order.
The
Contact Order fields become editable.
3. Using the drop down menus, select the desired order for each contact.
4. From the upper right, click Save Order.
The changes are saved.
7.6 Adding Occupants
Administrators can add occupant profiles to a location profile. This option can be used to ensure that
information about all current and past occupants is kept in the system for reference.
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the top left, click My Fire Department.
Under the Modules tab, click Locations.
From the list of locations, click the name of the location to edit.
From the toolbar at the top of the Location Profile page, hover your mouse above the Occupants
link.
5. From the resulting menu, click Add Occupant.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 170
The Occupant information page appears.
6. In the Occupant Information section, enter all information specific to this occupant.
HINT: To copy information that will be duplicated from the location, click the Populate from
Location button.
7. In the Address section, enter any address information that is different from the location’s address.
8. In the Contact Information section, enter all phone numbers and email addresses you want to
keep on file for this occupant.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 171
9. In the Position section, enter all geographic information about this occupant.
10. If your agency uses occupant groups, in the Groups section, select all groups to include this
occupant in.
HINT: To select multiple groups, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each desired
group.
11. In the Service Defined Questions section, enter any additional information requested about this
occupant.
12. In the Notes section, type any additional details you want to record about this occupant.
13. Click OK.
14. Using the linked provided on the Occupant Profile page, add any additional information.
HINT: For more information, please refer to Editing Occupant Profiles.
7.7 Editing Occupant Profiles
Administrators can edit occupant profiles to keep information current or to keep complete records of past
occupants. Each profile allows administrators to keep track of basic information about the occupant,
contact persons and inspections that have been performed. Information about the occupancy start and
end date determines whether this occupant will be considered a present or past occupant of the location.
To open an occupant record for editing:
1. Under the Modules tab, select the Occupants link.
OR
From a location record, from the toolbar at the top, hover over the Occupants tab.
2. Select the desired occupant.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 172
Components of an Occupant Record
Occupant records contain a variety of information about the tenants within a location. This
includes basic information about the locality of the occupant and location, a list of contacts and
inspections, an overview of maintenance information and activities taken in regards to this
occupant and any custom occupant questions that your service has defined.
This page is a summary of the occupant’s information, but most records can be opened to view
more detail or update them.
The occupant record allows you to edit overview information about the occupant, add or remove
contacts, add or remove inspection records, update the maintenance records for an occupant and
add or remove records for activities regarding this occupant.
Editing Basic Occupant Profile Information
Administrators can change basic occupant information including address and GPS position,
contact information, identification and occupancy information and any desired comments about
the occupant. Information about the occupancy start and end date determines whether this
occupant will be considered a present or past occupant of the location.
1. Open the desired occupant’s record.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 173
2. From the Occupant Information section, click Edit Occupant.
3. In the resulting page, use the provided fields to change or enter any information.
4. Click OK.
Adding Occupant Contacts
Information about contact persons for the occupant is available from the main Occupant Profile
page.
1. If the occupant’s profile is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of the page,
hover the mouse over the Occupants link and click the name of the desired occupant.
OR
From the left menu, select the Occupants button and select the desired occupant.
2. From the Occupant Contacts section, click Add Contact.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 174
The Lookup Contacts window appears.
3. To associate a contact already existing in the system with this occupant,
a. Locate the desired contact.
b. Click the contact’s name.
The contact is added
OR
To add a new contact to the system,
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 175
a. Click Create New Contact.
The Add Contact page appears.
b. In the Contact Name section, enter this contact’s name.
c. In the Business Name text box, type the name of the business or organization
this contact is with.
d. In the Street Address, Apt/Suite and/or P.O. Box fields, enter the contact’s
address.
e. From the Favorite Location drop down menu, select the appropriate city, county
and state.
OR
i.
In the Postal Code text box, type the zip code.
ii.
Click Update Now.
f. In the E-mail text box, type this contact’s email address.
g. In the Active Status section, select whether this contact should be active and
visible to all users or inactive and only visible to administrators within this section.
h. In the Phone Numbers section, enter all known phone numbers for this contact.
i. In the Miscellaneous Information section, enter all additional information about
this contact.
j. If your agency uses contact groups, in the Contact Groups section, select all
groups that this contact should be included in.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
k.
l.
P a g e | 176
HINT: To select multiple groups, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking
each desired group.
In the Notes section, type any additional information.
Click OK.
The contact is added to the system and associated with the occupant.
Editing Occupant Contacts
Information about contact persons for the occupant is available from the main Occupant Profile
page. Administrators can edit information about existing contact persons.
1. If the occupant’s profile is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of the page,
hover the mouse over the Occupants link and click the name of the desired occupant.
OR
From the left menu, select the Occupants button and select the desired occupant.
2. From the Occupant Contacts section, click the name of the contact person to edit.
Additional details about the contact appear.
3. From the resulting page, click Edit.
4. Using the provided fields, change or add all desired information about this contact
person.
5. Click OK.
Adding Inspections
Inspections are associated with occupants. Each occupant profile can have a list of inspections
performed with their results in order to keep a complete record.
1. If the occupant’s profile is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of the page,
hover the mouse over the Occupants link and click the name of the desired occupant.
OR
From the left menu, select the Occupants button and select the desired occupant.
2. From the Occupant Inspections section, click Add Inspection.
3. Using the provided fields, enter information about the inspection.
4. Click OK.
An inspection form appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 177
HINT: For more information about completing the inspection form, please refer to the
Working with Inspections chapter.
Editing Inspections
Administrators can return to inspection forms to edit existing information or to add additional
information. For more information about the information required on inspection forms, please refer
to the Working with Inspections chapter.
1. If the occupant’s profile is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of the page,
hover the mouse over the Occupants link and click the name of the desired occupant.
OR
From the left menu, select the Occupants button and select the desired occupant.
2. From the Occupant Inspections section, click the name of the inspection to edit.
An overview of the inspection will appear.
3. Click Edit.
4. Using the provided fields on each tab, change or enter information about the inspection.
HINT: For more information about completing an inspection form, please refer to the
Working with Inspections chapter.
Editing Maintenance Information
Each occupant record can keep track of when specific items were last inspected and maintained.
Administrators can edit the dates and description of recent maintenance and inspections.
1. If the occupant’s profile is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of the page,
hover the mouse over the Occupants link and click the name of the desired occupant.
OR
From the left menu, select the Occupants button and select the desired occupant.
2. From the Maintenance section, click Edit Maintenance.
3. Click Edit.
The fields become editable.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 178
4. In the resulting fields, type new information about maintenance.
5. When finished, click OK.
Adding Occupant Task Records
Occupant records can keep track of any contact or tasks your organization has related to the
occupant. Task records for occupants are used to keep track of each contact.
1. If the occupant’s profile is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of the page,
hover the mouse over the Occupants link and click the name of the desired occupant.
OR
From the left menu, select the Occupants button and select the desired occupant.
2. From the Tasks section, click Add Task.
The Task Details page appears.
3. Using the provided fields, type information to keep track of this contact with the occupant.
4. When finished, click Submit.
7.8 Summary of Pre-Plan Information
Pre-plan information for a location allows services to create a central position for all information that may
be useful in coordinating an incident. This includes basic instructions for handling an incident, detailed
information about that building (e.g., type of roof, location and type of water supplies, location and type of
utilities and fire suppression systems). This information can be accessed from the system at any time to
provide access instantly for those who need it on a call.
Any dangerous materials and hazmat that may be routinely kept at this location can be recorded to
ensure that responders are aware of its presence and can plan accordingly. In addition, the location
profile can provide a map to the location, a list of nearby fire hydrants and their information.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 179
7.9 Working with Plans and Building Information
Administrators can store instructions on a location’s profile for dealing with a potential incident as well as
more detailed information about the building. Any special instructions or information that should be
imparted to system users can be entered in the blank text fields, and more specified information about the
building, fire suppression techniques, utilities and water supplies can be included. In addition,
administrators can create more categories of building information to maintain organized records of
relevant information.
To access these basic planning options:
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the top left, click My Fire Department.
Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
From the list of locations, click the name of the location to edit.
From the toolbar at the top of the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select
Overview.
The Overview page appears.
5. Using the provided fields and information, complete any desired actions.
Generating a Pre-Plan Report
If your agency has pre-plan information set up for a specific location, you can quickly generate a
report with the pre-plan information in PDF format that can be saved or printed for offline access.
1. Open the desired location profile.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 180
2. From the toolbar at the top of the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and
select Pre-plan Report.
The report appears in a new tab or window.
Editing Overview Information
Administrators can edit the instructions and information available for users. The text fields allow
the administrator to type any instructions or information they want to pass on to the system users,
while the Additional Building Information section provides an organized area for building
information.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 181
1. If the pre-plan overview information is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of
the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select Overview.
2. To edit the free text in the text boxes, in the Preplan Description and Special Instructions
text boxes, change or add any desired text.
3. To edit existing building information,
a. From the Additional Building Information table, click the record to edit.
Information for that record appears in the fields below the table.
b. Using the provided fields, enter all relevant information for this building record.
c. When finished, click Save Utility.
4. When finished, at the bottom of the page, click Save.
Working with Building Information Categories
Administrators can customize the categories that appear to organize additional building
information. These categories can be added or removed, or rearranged to display the most
important first.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 182
1. If the pre-plan overview information is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of
the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select Overview.
2. Below the Additional Building Information table, beside the Category drop down menu,
click Add Category.
The Category Setup window appears.
3. To edit a category name, in the corresponding Category text box, change the information.
4. To change the order in which these categories appear in the Additional Building
Information table, in the Sort Order text boxes, type whole numbers conforming to the
order in which the categories should appear.
5. To add a new category, in the Add New Category section, type a name and sort order for
the category.
6. To delete a category, select the corresponding Delete checkbox.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 183
7. When finished, to save any changes, click OK.
To exit without saving changes, click Close.
Adding Building Information Records
Administrators can add new records to the Additional Building Information table.
1. If the pre-plan overview information is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of
the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select Overview.
2. Below the Additional Building Information table, in the Category drop down menu, select
the category in which this record should appear in the table.
3. In the Type text box, type an identifying name for this record (e.g., sprinkler system or
roof construction).
4. In the Location text box, type a description of where the item is within the location.
5. In the Description text box, type any additional information that may be relevant to this
record.
6. OPTIONAL: To check the spelling of your entry in the Description field, click the Spell
Check button.
7. When finished, click Save Additional Building Info.
7.10 Working with On-Site Materials
If a location contains materials that may be hazardous or that service personnel should know about when
working with the location, they can be recorded in the location’s profile.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
3. From the list of locations, click the correct location.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 184
4. From the toolbar at the top of the page, hover the house over the Pre-Plan Info link and select
On-Site Materials.
The list of on-site materials appears.
5. To add a new material,
a. From the Select On-Site Material drop down menu, select the correct substance.
b. From the Select On-Site Storage Use drop down menu, select the purpose of the
substance.
c. Click Add Material.
The material is recorded at the location.
7.11 Mapping a Location
The Fire Bridge will generate a map that can display hospitals, hydrants and stations near the location.
1.
2.
3.
4.
7/19/2013
From the top left, click My Fire Department.
Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
From the list of locations, click the name of the location to edit.
From the toolbar at the top of the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select
Mapping.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 185
The Mapping page appears.
5. OPTIONAL: To view hospitals, hydrants or stations whose location is logged in the Fire Bridge on
the map, from the Map Options section, select the appropriate options and click Filter Map.
The map displays the new information.
6. To zoom in or out, using the window overlaying the map, use your mouse wheel to zoom.
7. To move the portion of the map displayed, click within the map and drag to the desired position.
OR
Using the window overlaying the map, click the directional arrows until the desired portion of the
map is displayed.
8. OPTIONAL: To change the appearance of the map (i.e., to display only roads, a two-dimensional
image of the area, or a three-dimensional view of the area), from the window overlaying the map,
click Road, Aerial or Bird’s eye.
9. OPTIONAL: To display names of streets and other landmarks, from the window overlaying the
map, select the Show labels checkbox.
To hide names of streets and landmarks, from the window overlaying the map, deselect the Show
labels checkbox.
7.12 Working with Hydrant Records
Hydrant records can be found in several places within the system. Records can be associated with a
particular location to make it easier to find a hydrant in case of an incident, or a record can be created
independently of any location. Hydrant records that are associated with a location can be accessed
through both the hydrant records within that location and the Hydrants button in the left menu.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 186
To access hydrant records associated with a location:
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the top left, click My Fire Department.
Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
From the list of locations, click the name of the location to edit.
From the toolbar at the top of the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select
Hydrants.
A list of existing hydrants associated with this location appears.
Adding a Hydrant Record to a Location
You can associate a hydrant record in the system with any location. To add a hydrant to the
system, you will need to work in the Hydrants section (rather than the Hydrants section for the
location).
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 187
1. If the pre-plan hydrant information is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of
the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select Hydrants.
2. From the bottom of the page, click Add Hydrant.
The Hydrant Lookup page appears.
3. Locate the desired hydrant(s) to associate with this location.
4. Select the checkbox for each hydrant to associate with this location.
5. Click Add Selected Hydrant.
The hydrant(s) are associated with the location.
Viewing and Editing Existing Hydrant Records
Hydrant records can be opened either from a location record they are associated with or from the
Hydrants section.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 188
1. From the left menu, click Hydrants.
OR
From a location profile, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info button in the toolbar and
select Hydrants from the resulting menu.
HINT: Selecting Hydrants from the left menu will display all hydrant records saved in
the system, while opening the hydrant list from a location profile will display only those
hydrant records associated with the location.
2. To open a hydrant record, click the hyperlinked Hydrant ID or location.
The hydrant record opens.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 189
3. To change information in the record, click Edit.
The record becomes editable.
4. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
5. When finished, at the bottom of the page, click OK.
7.13 Working with HazMat Records
Administrators can save records of any hazardous materials that are stored at a location. To access the
HazMat records:
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the top left, click My Fire Department.
Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
From the list of locations, click the name of the location to edit.
From the toolbar at the top of the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select
HazMat.
A list of any existing HazMat records appears.
Viewing and Editing HazMat Records
Depending on the service’s permission groups, most system users will be able to view existing
HazMat records. Administrators can also edit these records to keep the location profile current.
1. If the pre-plan HazMat information is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of
the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select HazMat.
2. From the table of HazMat records, click the HazMat ID number of the desired record.
The record opens.
3. To edit the record,
a. Use the provided fields to change or enter all relevant information.
HINT: Be sure to enter the NFPA 704 fire diamond values.
b. When finished, to keep the changes, click Save.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 190
Creating New HazMat Records
Administrators can create new HazMat records for a location.
1. If the pre-plan HazMat information is not already displayed, from the toolbar at the top of
the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select HazMat.
2. Click Add HazMat.
The HazMat page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 191
3. Using the provided fields, complete the new record.
HINT: Be sure to enter the NFPA 704 fire diamond values.
4. When finished, to keep the new record, click Save.
7.14 Working with Sprinklers
Administrators can add sprinkler records to a location’s pre-plan information. This record can keep track
of basic information about the sprinkler and its location, information about testing and properties and any
other information your service would like to track.
To access sprinkler records:
1.
2.
3.
4.
From the top left, click My Fire Department.
Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
From the list of locations, click the name of the location to work with.
From the toolbar at the top of the page, hover the mouse over the Pre-Plan Info link and select
Sprinkler.
A list of existing sprinklers appears.
Adding Sprinkler Records
Administrators can add sprinkler records to a location’s record to keep track of the location and
type of sprinklers.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 192
1. If the list of sprinklers is not displayed, from the toolbar at the top of the page, hover the
mouse over Pre-Plan Info and select Sprinkler.
2. From the bottom of the page, click Add Sprinkler.
The Sprinkler page appears.
3. Using the provided fields, enter any desired and known information about the sprinkler.
4. When finished, from the bottom of the page, click Add.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 193
7.15 Working with Location Documents
Administrators can upload documents to the Fire Bridge that can be associated with a particular location.
This allows location profiles to contain floor plans, specifications or any other relevant files.
Viewing Documents
The Fire Bridge can contain documents and website links to be accessed and used as resources.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
3. From the toolbar at the top of the page, click Documents.
A list of attached documents appears.
4. To view a particular resource, from the list of documents, click the name of the desired
document.
Editing Document Information
Administrators can change the title of a document and the information that appears when a
system user rests his or her mouse above the title without clicking.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 194
3. From the toolbar at the top of the page, click Documents.
A list of attached documents appears.
4. From the list of documents, click the correct Edit Document icon
.
The Location Document Upload screen appears.
5. To change the title, in the Title text box, type the new title.
6. To change the explanation, in the Description text box, type the new text.
7. To save the information, click Submit.
Adding New Documents
Administrators can upload new documents to the location profile.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
3. From the toolbar at the top of the page, click Documents.
A list of attached documents appears.
4. From the Attached Documents table, click Add New Document.
5. In the Title text box, type a name for this document.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 195
6. In the Description text box, type a short description of this document.
NOTE: This short description will be displayed under the name of the document on
the Documents page.
7. In the File section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
8. Navigate to and select the desired document.
9. Click Open.
The document is selected and the Choose File dialog box closes.
10. Click Submit.
The new document is added to the Documents list.
Deleting Documents
Administrators with the correct permissions can remove documents from the document list. If
these documents will be used as a part of the service’s documentation, do not delete them.
Once they are deleted, these documents cannot be accessed from the system and any
documentation including these documents will no longer contain the document.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
3. From the toolbar at the top of the page, click Documents.
A list of attached documents appears.
4. From the Attached Documents table, for the document to remove, click the corresponding
Delete icon
.
The document is deleted.
7.16 Managing Organizations
Locations can be arranged into organizations, providing a way to group similar locations or tenants. This
can be useful in order to track problems that may be common to one particular organization, allowing the
fire service to anticipate future problems (e.g., if a particular landlord with multiple properties commonly
has malfunctioning sprinklers, the service may wish to schedule inspections for the landlord’s other
properties).
Users can work with existing organizations or add new organizations to ensure that information is up-todate.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 196
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, select Locations.
3. From below the list of locations, click Manage Organization.
A list of existing organizations appears.
4. To edit an existing organization,
a. From the list of organizations, click the desired organization name.
The organization profile appears.
b. In the Organization Information page, use the provided fields to enter all desired
information.
c. To save the information, click Edit.
5. To create a new organization,
a. Below the list of organizations, click Add Organization.
b. In the Organization Information page, use the provided fields to enter all desired
information.
c. To save the information, click Add.
6. To delete an organization,
a. From the list of organizations, click the desired organization name.
b. Click Delete.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 197
CHAPTER 8
MANAGING INSPECTIONS
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 198
8.1 Chapter Overview
System users can log and view inspection records for location occupants. This chapter explains where
and how to view inspection records and how to edit and add records.
Inspection Code Copyright Information
This software contains information which is proprietary to and copyrighted by or licensed to
International Code Council, Inc. The portions of information copyrighted by or licensed to the
International Code Council, Inc., have been obtained and reproduced with permission. The
acronym ICC®, the ICC logo, IFC, are federally protected trademarks and service marks of ICC.
All other code titles are the trademarks and services marks of the International Code Council,
Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Without advance written permission from the International Code
Council, Inc., no part of the International Code Council, Inc.’s copyrighted or licensed material
may be reproduced, distributed or transmitted in any form of by any means, including, without
limitation, electronic, optical or mechanical means (by way of example and not limitation,
photocopying, printing, or recording by or in an information storage retrieval system).
For information on permission to copy the International Code Council, Inc. materials, please
contact: Publications, 4051 West Flossmoor Road, Country Club Hills, IL 60478. Phone 1-888ICC-SAFE (422-7233).
8.2 Overview of Inspections
Inspection forms can be completed in the Fire Bridge and stored with an occupant’s profile to keep
complete records of any consultations, inspections or violations. In order to create inspection records and
complete inspection forms, the occupant being inspected and the location at which they reside must have
profiles created in the system. Keeping complete information within the occupant and location profile can
also make filling out inspection forms more efficient, as information can be copied from the profile into the
inspection form.
Inspections can be classified by type, which allows administrators to view categorical information about
the inspection at a glance. For instance, this is an easy way to distinguish between inspections that were
scheduled, consultations and follow-up inspections.
Inspections can also be completed using the optional Inspections client application, which can be
downloaded onto a laptop and used in the field. Instructions for the Inspections client application are
available separately.
8.3 Viewing Inspections
Administrators can schedule inspections, which will be recorded in the Fire Bridge and can be displayed
on the calendar in the Scheduler (if the optional Scheduler add-on is used). Other users can search
through and view scheduled and completed inspections. Inspections can be accessed from a list of all
inspections or from the profile of a specific occupant.
Completed inspections have multiple tabs that each contain different information about the inspection.
Viewing Inspections: From the Inspections Page
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 199
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inspections.
A list of inspections appears.
3. OPTIONAL: To search through the list for inspections that fit certain criteria, use the
fields at the top of the page to enter the desired criteria.
The list is filtered to display only those results matching the entered criteria.
4. To view more information about a particular inspection, click the inspection type of the
desired inspection.
5. Click through the tabs at the top of the page to display additional information.
Viewing Inspections: From the Occupant Profile
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 200
2. Under the Modules tab, click Occupants.
A list of occupants appears.
3. Select the occupant whose inspection you want to view.
The profile of the occupant will appear.
4. In the Occupant Inspections section, select the inspection you want to view.
5. Click through the tabs at the top of the page to display additional information.
8.4 Completing Inspection Records
Inspection records for an occupant can be created from the occupant’s profile. After submission of the
basic record (including date and inspector information and a summary of issues), system users can
complete the remaining inspection form information. To ensure a comprehensive record, complete all
forms detailed in the sections below.
Adding an Inspection Basic Form from the Inspections Page
System users must first complete the inspection basic form.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inspections.
A list of inspections appears.
3. At the bottom of the list, click Add Inspection.
A list of occupants appears.
4. Select which occupant you want to add an inspection form to.
5. In the Occupant Inspections section, click Add Inspection.
A blank inspection form will appear.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 201
6. Using the provided fields, enter the summary information about the inspection. When
finished, click OK.
The inspection form appears, with tabs for each additional section that can be completed.
7. If necessary, to edit any part of the inspection basic form, click Edit to return to the
editable record.
Adding an Inspection from the Occupant Profile
System users must first complete the inspection basic form.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Occupants.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 202
A list of occupants appears.
3. Select the occupant you want to add an inspection to.
The profile of the occupant will appear.
4. In the Occupant Inspections section, click Add Inspection.
A blank inspection form will appear.
5. Using the provided fields, enter the summary information about the inspection. When
finished, click OK.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 203
The inspection form appears, with tabs for each additional section that can be completed.
6. If necessary, to edit any part of the inspection basic form, click Edit to return to the
editable record.
Completing Supplemental Forms
Each inspection will require the inspector to complete certain forms specific to that occupant,
location or inspection type. These forms will need to be added to the inspection record and then
can be individually completed.
1. Add a new inspection or open the inspection you want to add supplemental forms to.
HINTS:
For more information about opening an inspection, please refer to the Viewing
Inspections: From the Inspections Page or Viewing Inspections: From the Occupant
Profile sections.
For more information about adding a new inspection, please refer to the Adding an
Inspection from the Inspections Module or Adding an Inspection from an Occupant Profile
sections.
2. Select the inspection you need to add supplemental forms to.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 204
3. From the inspection record, click the Supplemental Forms tab.
The Supplemental Forms page appears.
4. From the Available Forms scroll box, select the form(s) to add to the record.
HINT: To select more than one form, press and hold Ctrl while clicking each form. To
select a range, press and hold Shift while clicking the first and last forms in the range.
5. Click Add Selected Forms.
A list of attached forms beings in the Inspection Supplemental Forms table. The blank
forms are now available for completion.
6. To complete each form,
a. From the Inspection Supplemental Forms table, click the form to fill out.
The form appears in a new window.
b. Using the provided fields, complete the form.
c. When finished, click Submit.
7. To remove an unnecessary supplemental form,
a. From the Inspection Supplemental Forms table, click the form to remove.
The form appears in a new window.
b. From the bottom of the screen, click Delete.
c. From the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
8. Repeat steps 4–7 until all desired forms are completed.
The Occupancy Record
Information for the Occupancy tab is drawn from the occupant’s record. If this information is
incomplete, the inspection form will also be incomplete. To complete this tab, complete the
occupant’s record.
Reporting Violations
Information about any violations discovered during the inspection can be logged with the
inspection record. Each violation record can include classifying information such as its code and
category and details about dates or fines.
1. From the list of occupants, click the inspection you want to report a violation for.
HINTS:
For more information about opening an inspection, please refer to the Viewing
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 205
Inspections: From the Inspections Page or Viewing Inspections: From the Occupant
Profile sections.
For more information about adding a new inspection, please refer to the Adding an
Inspection from the Inspections Module or Adding an Inspection from an Occupant Profile
sections.
2. From the inspection record, click the Violations tab.
3. To create a new violation record, click Add Violation.
4. Use the provided fields to complete the violation record.
HINT: To browse a list for the code and category of the violation, click Lookup
Violation.
5. When finished documenting the violation, click OK.
6. Repeat steps 3–5 until all violations have been documented.
Updating Violation Records
You can update a violation record whenever needed. This is most commonly done when a
violation has been corrected and you need to record that date on which it was corrected and/or
re-inspected.
1. From the occupant’s record, click the inspection for which you want to update the
violation.
HINTS:
For more information about opening an inspection, please refer to the Viewing
Inspections: From the Inspections Page or Viewing Inspections: From the Occupant
Profile sections.
For more information about adding a new inspection, please refer to the Adding an
Inspection from the Inspections Module or Adding an Inspection from an Occupant Profile
sections.
2. From the inspection record, click the Violations tab.
The Violations page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 206
3. Click the violation or the violation code for the violation you want to update.
Additional details appear.
4. Click Edit.
The violation details become editable.
5. Using the provided fields, enter or update any additional details.
6. From the bottom of the page, click OK.
The violation record is updated.
Attaching Additional Documents
Documents can be attached to an inspection record to keep additional documentation. Some
useful documents that could be attached may include images of violations or bills for fines.
1. From the occupant’s record, click the inspection to which to add additional forms.
HINTS:
For more information about opening an inspection, please refer to the Viewing
Inspections: From the Inspections Page or Viewing Inspections: From the Occupant
Profile sections.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 207
For more information about adding a new inspection, please refer to the Adding an
Inspection from the Inspections Module or Adding an Inspection from an Occupant Profile
sections.
2. From the inspection record, click the Documents tab.
The Documents page appears.
3. To attach a new document, click Add New Document.
4. Using the provided fields, type a name and description for the document.
5. Click Browse… to locate the file to be uploaded and click Open when the desired
document is selected.
6. When finished, click Submit.
7. Repeat steps 3–6 until all desired documents are added.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 208
CHAPTER 9
WORKING WITH INVENTORY
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 209
9.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains how to work with sites, products and items in the Inventory module.
9.2 Introduction to ImageTrend’s Inventory Module
The Inventory module allows you to keep track of a wealth of information about the items you keep in
your agency. This can include the full specifications of each item, where it is located, any warranty
information and more.
9.3 Configuring your Dashboard
The Dashboard is the page you will see when you first open the Inventory module. It gives you a
snapshot of some of important information in your system. You can add “widgets” to the page to give you
quick access to the information you want to see and access most often.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens with the Dashboard tab displayed.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To view a list of all elements that can be displayed, from the right side, click Display Preferences.
From the list that appears, to display a particular element, select the corresponding checkbox.
To hide an element that is currently displayed, deselect the corresponding checkbox.
When you are satisfied with the selected modules to display on the Dashboard, click Save.
When finished, to hide the list, click Display Preferences again.
To move elements, hover the mouse directly above the element’s title until it becomes a four-
sided arrow
.
9. Click and drag the element to its new place on the page; all other elements will automatically
move to accommodate the new layout.
9.4 Overview of Product Categories, Products and Items
Product categories, products and items are all interconnected within the Inventory system to help you
keep track of your inventory. Understanding the way these work together and which is which will make
your efforts easier.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 210
Items are the individual things you enter into the system to keep track of; for example a specific hammer
or the laptop assigned to Engine 5. Products are things that you can buy or stock items of, with specific
attributes that will pertain to every item. For example, when you are adding computers to your inventory
system, the 12.1” Panasonic Toughbook C1 would be a product. If you have five Toughbook C1
computers, each of those five computers would be an item. Products and items are similar but are
entered separately, and you must have products set up before you have an item.
Product categories allow a way to organize your products, making them easier to find if you keep track of
a lot of inventory. You can have multiple levels of categories, allowing you to make organization as
specific as desired. For example, when you are adding your computers to the system, you could create a
top level category of computers. If you decide that you would like people to be able to further narrow
down the computers in the Inventory system, you could create sub-categories of desktop computers and
laptop computers. Products are then added within the category that is most suitable, and items are added
to the products.
9.5 Overview of Sites
Sites allow you to keep track of where items are. An individual site record keeps track of a particular
location where something can be stored. You can have multiple levels of sites; this allows you to create a
site record for every room within a building, or for every cabinet within a storage room. You can also have
sites that are also items within your inventory system (such as a desk or an ambulance). It is up to your
agency how many levels of sites you want to keep track of. A very detailed system could keep track down
to the level of individual drawers in a cabinet, while a more relaxed system may only keep track of the
rooms within the station. Sites can also be nested, to indicate when a site is contained within another site.
For instance, this allows you to list a desk within the room it is placed in, and the room within its station.
Each site record will have several different tabs to organize the information about the site.
Description
The Description tab contains the overview information about the site, including its name,
description and inventory type.
Products Within This Site
Each site can be set up with products that can be stored within it. This tab lists all products
that can be stored in the site and allows you to add products from the system to this site.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 211
Items Within This Site
All items that are recorded as being stored at this site will be listed in the Items Within This
Site tab. Items are not added to the site here, but are added from their products.
Sites Within This Site
If there are additional sites that have been set up within this site, they will be listed in this tab.
You can also add sites that should be within this one in this tab.
EXAMPLE: If your system has site records entered for a room and for each cabinet within
that room, you could view the site records for each cabinet within this tab for the room’s site
record.
Documents
You can upload documents with more information to any site record, and those documents
will be kept within the Documents tab. In addition, this tab will display any documents that
have been added to the parent sites for this one (e.g., if a document was uploaded to a room
site, that document would also be displayed in the site records for all cabinets in that room).
9.6 Viewing Sites
Once your sites are set up, you can view them from the system. Each individual site contains information
about the sites, products and items contained within the site. By default, sites are displayed as a “tree,”
meaning that any sites nested within another site are hidden until you expand them. You can choose to
either expand the tree or to view all sites as a list, which will no longer show the nesting.
Within each site record, several categories of information are contained. This includes information about
products that can be contained within this site, items that are contained within the site, other sites that are
nested under this site and any documents that are attached to the site record.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Sites link at the top of the page.
The Sites page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 212
NOTE: All sites, products, items, and setup for Inventory 2.0 is accessed by the links at the
top of the page.
4. OPTIONAL: To view sites nested within those that are already displayed, click the Expand icon
beside the desired site.
The next level of nested sites appears.
HINT: You can repeat this step as many times as you would like to view all the levels of sites.
5. OPTIONAL: To view all sites as a list without displaying the nesting information, from the drop
down menu on the right, click View as List and click Go.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 213
6. To view information about a particular site, click the name of that site.
Information about that site appears.
7. To view information about products, items, sites or documents within this site, click the
appropriate tab.
9.7 Adding a Site
You can add a new site as needed to keep track of locations where items can be stored.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Sites link.
The Sites page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 214
4. Click Add a Site.
The Add a Site page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type an identifying name for the site,
6. OPTIONAL: If this site is contained within another site, from the Parent Site drop down menu,
select the site containing this one.
7. In the Active section, select whether this site should currently be active and available for use in
the system or inactive and stored in the system for reference only.
8. In the Display Contact Information section, select whether this is a site that can have contact
information.
If Yes is selected, a Contact Information section appears.
9. If this site has contact information, in the Contact Information section, enter all known contact
information for this site.
10. In the Additional Comments section, enter any desired descriptions for the site.
11. Click Save.
The site is saved and additional tabs appear.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 215
9.8 Adding a Product to a Site
Adding a product to a site allows you to record items of that product that are stored within the site. The
products must have already been created in the system before you can add them to the site. Products
that are added to a site will not be added to the sites beneath this one (e.g., if you add a product to a
room, it will not be added to the site records for the cabinets within the room).
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Sites link.
The Sites page appears.
4. Locate the desired site.
5. Click the name of the site to open it.
6. Select the Products Within This Site tab.
The Products Within This Site page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 216
7. Click the Add a Product To This Site button.
The Product Lookup window appears.
8. Using the provided fields, enter any information you know about the product to search for it.
HINT: If you want to view all products, leave the fields blank.
9. Click Search.
A list of all possible products matching your search criteria appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
10. For the desired product, click the Add icon
The product is added.
P a g e | 217
.
9.9 Adding a Site Within a Site
Sites can be added in several places. You can always add a site from the main Sites tab. However, if you
are working with a single site and adding all the sites within it (for example, if you are working with the site
record for a desk and want to add records for each of the drawers), you can add sites from the parent site
profile.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Sites link.
The Sites page appears.
4. Locate the desired site.
5. Click the name of the site to open it.
6. Select the Sites Within This Site tab.
A list of all sites within the open site appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 218
7. Click Add a Site Within This Site.
The Add a Site page appears.
8. In the Name text box, type an identifying name for the site,
9. In the Active section, select whether this site should currently be active and available for use in
the system or inactive and stored in the system for reference only.
10. In the Display Contact Information section, select whether this is a site that can have contact
information.
If Yes is selected, a Contact Information section appears.
11. If this site has contact information, in the Contact Information section, enter all known contact
information for this site.
12. In the Additional Comments section, enter any desired descriptions for the site.
13. Click Save.
The site is saved and additional tabs appear.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 219
9.10 Adding a Document to a Site
If you have any documents that you would like to store with a site record, you can do so. This can be an
easy way to keep track of any more details specifications, maintenance instructions, manuals or other
important documents. Documents that are added to this site will also be displayed in sites within this site
(e.g., if a document was uploaded to a room site, that document would also be displayed in the site
records for all cabinets in that room).
For security, not all file types can be uploaded to the Inventory system.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Select the Sites link.
The Sites tab appears.
4. Click the Expand icons
for the sites until you locate the desired site.
5. Click the site name to open its profile.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 220
6. Select the Documents tab.
The Documents tab appears.
7. Click Upload a Document.
The Upload a Document page appears.
8. In the Name text box, type a name for this document.
9. From the Document Type drop down menu, select the type of document you are uploading.
10. In the Upload section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
11. Navigate to and select the document you want to upload.
12. Click Open.
The Choose File dialog box closes.
13. Click Upload.
The document is added to the record.
9.11 Overview of a Product
Products are things that you can buy or stock items of, with specific attributes that will pertain to every
item. Product records should contain all information that will be the same for all the items created from
this product this can include information about the manufacturer, brand and model, cost and vendors, as
well as photos and a description. This information will then be automatically entered for each item created
from this product.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 221
There are several tabs within a product record to keep track of different information about the product.
Description
The Description tab contains the basic information you enter about the product when it is
created and the majority of information that will be used to create items. This includes
information about the name, brand and model, cost and other logistics of the product.
Items
The Items tab lists all items of this product that are in the system, as well as allowing you to
add additional items.
Documents
The Documents tab lists all documents that have been uploaded for this product and allows
you to add new documents. This could include manuals, product specifications, assembly
guides or other important documents that you would like to keep with the product information.
9.12 Viewing a Product Record
Products are organized based on their product categories. You can navigate through the categories to
view the desired product record or you can search to find the desired record.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 222
3. Select the Products link.
The Products tab appears.
4. Click the Expand icons
for the categories until you locate the desired product.
OR
a. From the header at the top of the page, from the drop down menu, select View as List.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 223
b. Click Go.
Al products appear in a list.
c. Locate the desired product or use the Search text box to find the product.
5. Click the product name to open its profile.
The product record displays.
Locating a Product Record with a Barcode Scanner
If you use barcode scanners, you can locate a product by scanning the product.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Select the Products link.
4. Use the barcode scanner to scan the product or type the barcode in the Barcode Search
text box and click Go.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 224
The product record opens.
9.13 Adding a Product to the System
A product is a specific object that you can purchase a quantity of, with specific attributes that will pertain
to every item. For example, a product could be the 12.1” Panasonic Toughbook C1 laptop. Each laptop
you buy would be considered an item.
Products are divided into categories to help organize the many products your agency can record. When
you add a product, you can define which category it should be classified under.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Select the Products link.
The Products tab appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 225
4. Click Add a Product.
The Add a Product page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type a descriptive name for this product.
HINT: Make the name as descriptive as possible to avoid confusion. For example, if you have
three different types of men’s boots, be sure the name is specific enough that someone adding
items for these products will know which product is which.
6. From the Product Category drop down menu, select the category in which this product will be
classified.
HINT: Depending on your agency’s setup, product categories may be nested (e.g., there may
be a category for boots under another category for apparel). In this case, place the product in the
category that applies best to this product.
7. Using the remaining fields in the Product Details section, enter all known information about this
product.
8. In the Active section, select whether this product should be active and available for use in the
system, or inactive and available in the system only for reference.
9. In the Description section, enter any additional descriptive information about the product (e.g.,
dimensions or a short summary of the product).
10. When finished, from the bottom of the page, click Save.
The product is added.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 226
Adding a Product through a Barcode
If you are working with a barcode scanner, scanning a product that does not already have a
product record in the system will automatically help you add a new product with the barcode
already filled in.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Select the Products link.
4. Use the barcode scanner to scan the new product or type the barcode in the Barcode
Search text box and click Go.
The Add a Product page appears with the barcode number completed.
5. Using the provided fields, complete the rest of the form for this product.
6. When finished, from the bottom of the page, click Save.
The product is added.
Adding Photos to a Product
Each product can have a gallery of photos to make it easy to identify. You can upload these
photos and select one photo to be the primary picture for the product.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 227
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Select the Products link.
The Products tab appears.
4. Click the Expand icons
7/19/2013
for the categories until you locate the desired product.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 228
5. Click the product name to open its profile.
The product record displays.
6. Click the No Photo Available icon or the product’s photo.
The Images window appears.
7. In the Upload Images section, click Browse.
The Upload File dialog box appears.
8. Navigate to and select the first image you want to upload.
9. Click Open.
10. Repeat steps 7–9 until all desired pictures are added.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 229
11. Click Save.
The images are uploaded and added to the gallery for the product.
12. To select a photo to appear as the default photo on the product’s information page,
a. Click the No Photo Available icon or the product’s photo.
The Images window appears.
b. Click the photo you would like to appear as the default photo for this product.
A red line appears around the photo.
c. Click Save.
The photo is applied.
9.14 Editing a Product Record
If necessary, you can edit the record for a product.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Select the Products link.
The Products tab appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
4. Click the Expand icons
P a g e | 230
for the categories until you locate the desired product.
5. Click the product name to open its profile.
The product record displays.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 231
6. From the bottom of the Description page, click Edit.
The fields become editable.
7. Make any desired changes.
8. From the bottom of the page, click Save.
9.15 Adding a Document to a Product
If you have any documents that you would like to store with a product record, you can do so. This can be
an easy way to keep track of any more details specifications, maintenance instructions, manuals or other
important documents.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Select the Products link.
The Products tab appears.
4. Click the Expand icons
for the categories until you locate the desired product.
5. Click the product name to open its profile.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 232
6. Select the Documents tab.
The Documents tab appears.
7. Click Upload a Document.
The Upload a Document page appears.
8. In the Name text box, type a name for this document.
9. From the Document Type drop down menu, select the type of document you are uploading.
10. In the Upload section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
11. Navigate to and select the document you want to upload.
12. Click Open.
The Choose File dialog box closes.
13. Click Upload.
The document is added to the record.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 233
9.16 Overview of an Item
Items are individual things that you are keeping track of in the system, such as the phone at your desk or
a specific pair of boots. Item records are created based on product records, which helps you to know
exactly how many of a specific product you have and makes it easier to create item records for products
that you may have multiple items for. Each item can also have a maintenance record, including records
for each time maintenance was performed and any repairs done.
Items can also function as sites, if the item can store other items (for example, you may record your
cabinets as items but also use the cabinets as sites that store tools). This is a setting specified when the
item is first set up, and if an item is also a site it will have a separate item and site profile.
Item records have several tabs to keep track of different information. Depending on the item, some
additional tabs may appear to keep track of information that is specific to this type of item.
Description
The Description tab keeps track of the basic details about the item, including its serial
number, the site is stored at, any important dates and comments about this item.
Sites on Item
The Sites on Item tab will only appear if this item is also a site. If there are sites listed within
this one, they will be listed in this tab. You can also add a site to this one from here.
Specifications
For certain types of products and items, additional specifications can be entered based on
how that product is configured in your service. You can fill out this specification information
from here.
Documents
The Documents tab lists all documents that have been uploaded for this item and allows you
to add new documents. This could include manuals, product specifications, assembly guides
or other important documents that you would like to keep with the product information.
Documents that were uploaded for this item’s product will also appear here.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 234
Allocation
The Allocation tab lists all records for when this item was given to someone for use. You can
also record a new allocation here.
Maintenance
The Maintenance tab lists all maintenance records for the item. You can also record a new
maintenance record here.
Repairs
If any required repairs are indicated in maintenance records, those repairs will be
documented in the Repairs tab. You can view and add repair records here.
Transaction Log
The Transaction Log tab records dates affecting this item, from warranty and purchase dates
to allocation dates.
Usage
The Usage tab records information for consumable items. When a consumable item is
recorded as being used in an incident, the record will appear here in the item profile. You can
also add usage records in this tab.
Viewing Item Statistics
When you view items from the Items tab or a list of items for a product or site, you can view
statistics about the items currently being displayed. This allows you to view the number of items
and their total value. If you use a filter to view only specific items, the statistics displayed will only
apply to those specific items.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. As desired, open the Items page, the Items tab within the product record or the Items
Within This Site tab within a site.
The appropriate Items page appears, with the statistical information displayed.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 235
9.17 Adding an Item to the System
Each item must be associated with a product; you can add a new item directly from the associated
product record or from the Items page.
Adding an Item from a Product Record
When adding an item from a product record, some of the item information will already be
completed from the product.
1. Open the product record for type of item you want to add.
The Description page of the product record appears.
2. Within the product record, click the Items tab.
The Items tab appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 236
3. Click Add Items.
The Add Items page appears.
4. In the Name text box, type a name for this item.
5. From the Product drop down menu, select the product.
NOTES:
Depending on which browser you are using, the product may already be selected. If it is
selected, you will not see this field.
Once you select the product, some additional details might be filled in.
6. If needed, in the Model and Brand text boxes, fill in the model and brand for this item.
NOTE: Depending on the browser you are using, this information may already be
filled out.
7. From the Site drop down menu, select the site at which this item is stored.
8. From the Inventory Type drop down menu, select whether this item should also be
classified as a site.
HINT: If you choose to classify this item as both an item and a site, a record will be
created for it both as a site and as an item. Please keep in mind that most information is
not shared between the site and item records; for example, if you add a document to the
site record, it will not be reflected in the item record.
9. As appropriate, use the provided fields to enter the serial number, tag number and size of
the item.
10. In the Capacity text box, type the quantity included in this item.
EXAMPLE: If you are creating an item for a box of 15 masks, type 15.
11. If this item has a minimum capacity, in the Minimum Capacity text box, type the capacity.
12. In the Consumable Within Incident section, select whether this item is a consumable.
HINT: If you select Yes, this item will be available for crew members to select on run
forms as being consumed.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 237
13. To set up a default number that should be marked as being consumed on an incident
form if this item is selected as being used, type the desired number in the Incident Form
Default text box.
NOTE: This field is not applicable if this item is not a consumable.
14. In the Number of Items text box, type how many item records you would like to add at this
time.
HINT: If you want to add multiple items for a single product with the same information,
this can be very useful. However, keep in mind that if you will be entering serial numbers
or other information that will be different for each item, you will either need to add each
item separately or edit each item’s record individually after creating them.
15. In the remaining fields in the Purchase Information section, enter all known information.
16. If applicable, in the Custom Questions section, answer all questions.
17. In the Additional Comments section, enter any additional information about this item.
18. Click Add Item.
The item(s) are added.
Adding an Item from the Items Page
When adding an item from the Items page, you will need to complete some product information.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 238
4. Click Add an Inventory Item.
The Add an Item page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type a name for this item.
6. From the Product drop down menu, select the product.
7. If needed, in the Model and Brand text boxes, fill in the model and brand for this item.
NOTE: Depending on the product you selected, this information may already be filled
out.
8. From the Site drop down menu, select the site at which this item is stored.
9. From the Inventory Type drop down menu, select whether this item should also be
classified as a site.
HINT: If you choose to classify this item as both an item and a site, a record will be
created for it both as a site and as an item. Please keep in mind that most information is
not shared between the site and item records; for example, if you add a document to the
site record, it will not be reflected in the item record.
10. As appropriate, use the provided fields to enter the serial number, tag number and size of
the item.
11. In the Capacity text box, type the quantity included in this item.
EXAMPLE: If you are creating an item for a box of 15 masks, type 15.
12. If this item has a minimum capacity, in the Minimum Capacity text box, type the capacity.
13. In the Consumable Within Incident section, select whether this item is a consumable.
HINT: If you select Yes, this item will be available for crew members to select on run
forms as being consumed.
14. To set up a default number that should be marked as being consumed on an incident
form if this item is selected as being used, type the desired number in the Incident Form
Default text box.
NOTE: This field is not applicable if this item is not a consumable.
15. In the Number of Items text box, type how many item records you would like to add at this
time.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
16.
17.
18.
19.
P a g e | 239
HINT: If you want to add multiple items for a single product with the same information,
this can be very useful. However, keep in mind that if you will be entering serial numbers
or other information that will be different for each item, you will either need to add each
item separately or edit each item’s record individually after creating them.
In the remaining fields in the Purchase Information section, enter all known information.
If applicable, in the Custom Questions section, answer all questions.
In the Additional Comments section, enter any additional information about this item.
Click Add Item.
The item record is saved and the full item profile appears.
9.18 Copying an Item
If you have many items that should all have the same information, you can copy an item profile to create
more item records. If you choose to do this, allocation information, documents and information about sites
within the item will not be copied. The new item will be named Copy of (Original Item Name).
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
4. Click the item name to open its profile.
5. From the bottom of the Description tab, click Copy.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Click OK.
Another item record is created.
9.19 Editing Item Information
If needed, you can edit the basic information for an item.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 240
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
4. Click the item name to open its profile.
5. From the bottom of the Description tab, click Edit.
The fields become editable.
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes.
7. From the bottom of the page, click Save.
9.20 Viewing an Item’s Record
You can view an item’s record from the Items tab as well as locating it from its product or site.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 241
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
4. To view only items for a certain site, product category, or starting with a certain letter, use the
appropriate fields to select your criteria.
5. Click Go.
6. When you locate the desired item record, click the name.
The item record appears.
7. To view additional details about the item, click the appropriate link in the left menu.
Locating Items with a Barcode Scanner
If you use a barcode scanner, you can scan a products barcode to locate all items for that
product.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 242
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
4. Use the barcode scanner to scan the product or type the barcode in the Barcode Search
text box and click Go.
A list of all items with that barcode opens.
9.21 Adding a Document to an Item
If you have any documents that you would like to store with an item record, you can do so. This can be an
easy way to keep track of any more details specifications, maintenance instructions, manuals or other
important documents. Documents that have been added to the product for this item will also be displayed
with the item record.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
4. Click the item name to open its profile.
5. From the left menu, click Documents.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 243
The Documents tab appears.
6. Click Upload a Document.
The Upload a Document page appears.
7. In the Name text box, type a name for this document.
8. From the Document Type drop down menu, select the type of document you are uploading.
9. In the Upload section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
10. Navigate to and select the document you want to upload.
11. Click Open.
The Choose File dialog box closes.
12. Click Upload.
The document is added to the record.
9.22 Allocating an Item
If an item is assigned to someone, you can record that allocation in the system to help keep track of the
item. The person you are allocating the item to must be a staff member of your service who has an
account set up in the system.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 244
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears.
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
4. Click the item name to open its profile.
5. From the left menu, click Allocation.
6. Click the Add an Allocation Record button.
The Allocation Details page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 245
7. In the User section, click the Lookup icon
The User Lookup window appears.
.
8. In the fields at the top of the window, enter any known information to search for the user.
9. From the bottom left corner of the window, click Search.
A list of all users matching your criteria appears.
10. For the desired user, click the Add icon
7/19/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 246
HINT: Instead of using the search option, typing the name of the person in the User
Autocomplete text box in the Allocation Details page will cause a list of names matching what is
typed in to appear.
11. In the Date Allocated text box, type the date that this person was assigned this item.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
12. In the Expected Return Date text box, type the date that this person is expected to return this
item.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
13. OPTIONAL: If the item has already been returned, in the Date Returned text box, type the date
the person returned this item.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
14. In the Description text box, type any other information about the allocation.
15. When finished, click Save.
The allocation record is saved for this item.
Marking an Allocated Item as Returned
Once an item has been allocated, you should also mark the item as returned once the item is
brought back. This will keep your inventory system up to date and prevent items from being
marked as overdue.
1. Open the desired item record.
2. Select the Allocation tab.
A list of all allocations for this item appears.
3. For the desired allocation record, click the Edit icon
The allocation record opens.
7/19/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 247
4. In the Date Returned text box, type the date the person returned this item.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
5. When finished, click Save.
9.23 Viewing Repair Information for an Item
The Repairs tab in an item lists all repairs that have been done on this item, as well as a summary with
information about the replacement parts. For more information about adding a repair record, please refer
to the Adding a Repair for an Item section of this chapter.
1. Open the desired item record.
2. From the left menu, click Repairs.
The Repairs page appears.
3. To view summary information about the parts involved in a repair, look at the Current Item
Statistics section in the bottom right.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 248
4. To view a specific repair, click the name of the repair.
The repair record appears.
9.24 Viewing the Transaction Log for an Item
The transaction log keeps track of any dates and events that have affected this item. This can include
dates for moving items, purchasing items or the date an item was put in service.
1. Open the desired item record.
2. From the left menu, select the Transaction Log link.
The transaction log appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 249
9.25 Viewing Usage of an Item
If an item is a consumable, you can view statistics about its usage from the item profile. This can be
useful to keep track of the number of pieces left of an item.
1. Open the desired item record.
2. From the left menu, select the Usage link.
The Usage page appears.
9.26 Adding a Usage Record for an Item
The Inventory system can keep track of how many of an item has been used based on the number of
items in the system and the number of items marked as used in run forms or in the item’s profile. You can
mark any items as used from the item profile.
1. Open the desired item record.
2. From the left menu, select the Usage link.
The Usage page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 250
3. Click Add.
The Item Use Records page appears.
4. In the Quantity text box, type the number of this item that were used.
5. In the Date Used text box, type the date that these items were used.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
6. From the Use drop down menu, select what this item was used for.
7. In the Description text box, type any additional information about this use of the item.
8. When finished, click Save.
he usage record is saved and the amount of this item that you have on hand is updated.
9.27 Working with Multiple Items
Within a site record, product record or the Items tab, you can perform certain actions for multiple items.
This can help you to quickly manage your items in the Inventory system based on the site the items are
within, items for a particular product or any selection of items.
Deleting Multiple Items
You can delete multiple items from your system if needed. Please remember that when you
choose to delete an item from a site or product record, it will be removed from the entire Inventory
system.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
3. Click the Items link.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 251
4. The Items tab appears.
NOTE: You can also perform these actions of the lists of items within a site or a
product.
5. Select the checkboxes for all items you want to delete.
6. From the Bulk Actions drop down menu in the bottom left, select Delete Selected Items.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
7. Select OK.
The items are deleted from the system.
Moving Multiple Items
You can choose to move multiple items to a specific site if needed.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
NOTE: You can also perform these actions of the lists of items within a site or a
product.
4. Select the checkboxes for all items you want to move.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 252
5. From the Bulk Actions drop down menu on the lower left, select Move Selected Items.
The Move Selected Items page appears.
6. From the Site drop down menu for each item, select the new site.
OR
To move all items to the same site, from the Site drop down menu in the header row,
select the new site.
7. From the bottom of the page, click Save.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
8. Click OK.
Allocating Multiple Items
You can choose to allocate multiple items at a time.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
NOTE: You can also perform these actions of the lists of items within a site or a
product.
4. Select the checkboxes for all items you want to allocate.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 253
5. From the Bulk Actions drop down menu in the lower left, click Allocate Selected Items.
The Allocation Details page appears.
6. In the User section, click the Lookup icon
The User Lookup window appears.
.
7. In the fields at the top of the window, enter any known information to search for the user.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 254
8. From the bottom left corner of the window, click Search.
A list of all users matching your criteria appears.
9. For the desired user, click the Add icon
.
10. In the Date Allocated text box, type the date that this person is expected to return this
item.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
11. In the Date Allocated text box, type the date that this person was assigned this item.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
12. OPTIONAL: If the item has already been returned, in the Date Returned text box, type
the date the person returned this item.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
13. In the Description text box, type any other information about the allocation.
14. When finished, click Save.
The allocation record is saved for these items.
Updating Item Information for Multiple Items
You can update the information for multiple items at the same time, if needed. When you edit the
items, fields with information in them will overwrite any previous information in that item record.
Fields that are not completed will not make any changes to the original item record.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 255
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
NOTE: You can also perform these actions of the lists of items within a site or a
product.
4. Select the checkboxes for all items you want to edit.
5. From the Bulk Actions drop down menu in the lower left, click Update All.
A blank form appears with fields to enter item details.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 256
6. Using the provided fields, make any desired changes that should be applied to all the
selected item records.
7. When finished, click Save.
The changes are applied.
Updating Item Details for Multiple Items
You can update details for multiple items at once, including the items’ name, serial or tag number,
site, size, capacity, cost, vendor or funding source.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
NOTE: You can also perform these actions of the lists of items within a site or a
product.
4. Select the checkboxes for all items you want to edit.
5. From the Bulk Actions drop down menu in the lower left, click Update Details.
The Items page appears.
6. Using the provided fields, make any changes to the details for these items.
NOTES:
All changes that you make here will apply to all selected items.
Any fields that you leave blank will not be changed from their current value.
7. When finished, click Save.
Adding Maintenance Records for Multiple Items
You can create maintenance records for multiple items from the Items page. This allows you to
easily create a batch of maintenance records for items that all passed the same maintenance
test. You can go back and edit individual records later if needed.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 257
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
3. Click the Items link.
The Items tab appears.
NOTE: You can also perform these actions of the lists of items within a site or a
product.
4. Select the checkboxes for all items you want to edit.
5. From the Bulk Actions drop down menu in the lower left, click Create Maintenance
Record.
The Bulk Add Maintenance page appears.
6. Use the provided fields to enter the maintenance information.
HINT: For more information about filling in a maintenance record, please refer to the
Entering a Maintenance Record for an Item section of this chapter.
7. When finished, click Save.
The maintenance records are added.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 258
9.28 Overview of Maintenance Records
Maintenance records are associated with the items that the maintenance was performed upon and can be
accessed either from that item’s record or from the Maintenance tab. Each maintenance record can track
and schedule maintenance, and contains basic information such as the test date, status and whether the
test was passed, as well as details specific to that type of maintenance and access to any repair
information or documents associated with the maintenance.
There are several tabs associated with each maintenance record.
Specifications
The Specifications tab contains additional questions that will change based on the type of
maintenance performed.
Details
The Details tab contains basic information that will be collected for all maintenance, such as
the test dates, whether the test was passed and comments.
Repairs
The Repairs tab contains a list of all repairs associated with this maintenance as well as
summary information about how many items were needed for repairs and their total cost.
Documents
The Documents tab contains a list of any documents that have been uploaded and
associated with this maintenance record.
9.29 Viewing a Maintenance Record
You can view a maintenance record either from the item it is associated with or from the Maintenance tab.
1.
2.
3.
7/19/2013
Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
Select the Maintenance link.
OR
a. Select the Items link.
The Items page appears.
b. Navigate to the desired item and click its name.
The Description section of the item’s profile appears.
c. From the left menu, click Maintenance.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 259
4.
Click the name of the maintenance record to view.
The record appears.
5.
As needed, click additional tabs of the maintenance record to view more information.
9.30 Adding a Maintenance Record
You can add a maintenance record to the system from the Maintenance section or from the item record.
Adding a Maintenance Record from the Item Profile
If you add a maintenance record directly from the profile of the item, you will not need to search
for the desired item.
1. Open the desired item record.
2. From the left menu, click Maintenance.
The Maintenance page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 260
3. Click Add a Maintenance Record.
A new maintenance record appears.
4. In the Name text box, type an identifying name for this maintenance record.
5. From the Category drop down menu, select the type of maintenance that was done.
6. In the Tested On text box, type the date that this item was tested.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
6. In the Next Test text box, type the date that this item should be tested next.
OR
7.
8.
9.
10.
7/19/2013
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
In the Test Passed section, select whether this item passed the text.
In the Warranty Failure section, select whether there was any failure currently covered by
warranty detected.
From the Status drop down menu, select the status of this maintenance record.
In the Additional Comments section, enter any extra details of the maintenance record.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 261
11. When finished, click Save.
The maintenance record is saved and additional information appears.
12. Click into any additional tabs to record more details about the maintenance.
HINTS:
Information about the specific type of maintenance record can be recorded in the
Specifications tab.
Information about any needed repairs can be documented in the Repairs tab for the
maintenance record.
Any documents or files that should be attached to the maintenance record can be
included in the Documents tab.
Adding a Maintenance Record from the Maintenance Tab
You can add a new maintenance record to the system from the Maintenance tab and it will be
reflected in the profile of the item that you associate it with.
1.
2.
3.
7/19/2013
Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My
Fire Department.
Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
Select the Maintenance link.
The Maintenance page appears.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
7/19/2013
P a g e | 262
4.
Click Add Maintenance Record.
The Add Maintenance page appears.
5.
6.
7.
In the Name text box, type an identifying name for this maintenance record.
From the Category drop down menu, select the type of maintenance that was done.
In the Inventory Items section, click Set Inventory Items.
The Select Inventory Search Criteria page appears.
8.
Using the provided fields, enter search criteria to locate the item this maintenance record
should be associated with.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
9.
P a g e | 263
Click Search.
A list of all items matching your criteria appears.
10. Select the checkbox(es) for all item(s) to add this maintenance record to.
11. Click Save.
The items are selected and you are returned to the maintenance record.
12. In the Tested On text box, type the date that this item was tested.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
13. In the Next Test text box, type the date that this item should be tested next.
OR
14.
15.
16.
17.
7/19/2013
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
In the Test Passed section, select whether this item passed the text.
In the Warranty Failure section, select whether there was any failure currently covered by
warranty detected.
From the Status drop down menu, select the status of this maintenance record.
In the Additional Comments section, enter any extra details of the maintenance record.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 264
18. When finished, click Save.
The maintenance record is saved and additional information appears.
19. Click into any additional tabs to record more details about the maintenance.
HINTS:
Information about the specific type of maintenance record can be recorded in the
Specifications tab.
Information about any needed repairs can be documented in the Repairs tab for the
maintenance record.
Any documents or files that should be attached to the maintenance record can be
included in the Documents tab.
Documenting Maintenance Specifications
Each type of maintenance record can have additional questions to be completed, which are
included under the Specifications tab after creating the maintenance record.
1. Add or open the desired maintenance record.
2. Select the Specifications tab.
The Specifications tab appears.
NOTE: Depending on the way your maintenance records are set up, you may see
different questions for your items.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 265
3. Click Edit.
The fields become editable.
4. Use the provided fields to complete the details of the maintenance.
NOTE: Your agency may have different fields to complete than those shown here,
depending on your agency’s requirements and the type of item.
5. When finished, click Save.
Recording Repairs for a Maintenance Record
If a maintenance inspection indicates that there are repairs needed for an item, you can
document those repairs within the maintenance record after it is created.
1. Add or open the desired maintenance record.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 266
2. Select the Repairs tab.
The Repairs tab appears.
3. Click Add a Repair.
The Maintenance Repair Details page appears.
4. In the Name text box, type the name of this repair.
5. From the Status drop down menu, select the current status of the repair.
NOTE: You can update this status later if you need to do so.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 267
6. In the Date text box, enter the date of this repair.
OR
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
In the Cost text box, type the cost of the repair.
In the Short Description and/or Long Description text box, type any additional details
about the repair.
In the Repaired By text box, type the name of the person who performed the repair.
In the Staff Hours Spent text box, type the number of hours spent on this repair by your
agency’s staff.
In the Downtime Start Date text box, type the date that this item was first taken out of use
for this repair.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
12. In the Downtime End Date text box, type the date that this item was returned to service
after this repair.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
13. In the Retest section, select whether this item will need to be retested after the repair.
14. Click Save.
The repair record is added and the Parts link appears.
15. OPTIONAL: To record parts that were used in this repair,
a. From the repair record, click the Parts link.
The Parts page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 268
b. Click the Add a Part button.
The Add a Part page appears.
c. In the Name text box, type the name of the part.
d. From the Vendor drop down menu, select the name of the vendor from whom
you bought the part.
e. In the Cost text box, type the cost of the part.
f. In the Short Description and/or Long Description text boxes, type any additional
details about the part.
g. Click Save.
h. Repeat steps a–g for all needed parts.
NOTE: As you add parts, statistics will appear on the Parts page detailing the
number and value of parts needed for this repair.
Adding a Document for a Maintenance Record
You can attach any document to a maintenance record if needed to keep track of it. This could
include a receipt for repairs or an image of any repairs required.
1. Add or open the desired maintenance record.
2. Select the Documents tab.
The Documents tab appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 269
3. Click Upload a Document.
The Documents page appears.
4. In the Name text box, type a name for this document.
5. From the Document Type drop down menu, select the type of document you are
uploading.
6. In the Upload section, click Choose File.
The Choose File dialog box appears.
7. Navigate to and select the document you want to upload.
8. Click Open.
The Choose File dialog box closes.
9. Click Upload.
The document is added to the record.
9.31 Adding a Repair for an Item
Any item can have a repair added either through the maintenance record with which the repair should be
associated, from the Repairs section of the item’s profile or from the Repairs tab in the system. All repairs
will be associated with a specific item and maintenance record, no matter where you add them.
1. Once you are logged in to the Fire Bridge system, if necessary, from the top left, click My Fire
Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module appears
3. Open the desired maintenance record.
OR
From the top of the page, click the Repairs link.
OR
a. Open the desired item record.
b. From the left menu, click the Repairs link.
4. Click Add a Repair.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 270
The Add a Repair page appears.
NOTE: Depending on where you started the repair record from, some of the information may
already be filled out, or some of the field pictured in the image below may not appear.
5. In the Name text box, type the name of this repair.
6. From the Status drop down menu, select the current status of the repair.
NOTE: You can update this status later if you need to do so.
7. If the Inventory Items section is displayed,
a. In the Inventory Items section, click Set Inventory Items.
The Select Inventory Search Criteria page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 271
b. Using the provided fields, enter search criteria to locate the item this repair record should
be associated with.
c. Click Search.
A list of all items matching your criteria appears.
d. Select the checkbox(es) for all item(s) to add this repair record to.
e. Click Save.
The items are selected and the Maintenance Record field appears.
8. If the Maintenance Record field is displayed as a drop down menu, select the maintenance record
that this repair should be attached to.
OR
If the Maintenance Record field displays a link,
a. Click the Set Maintenance Record link.
The Details page appears, with a list of each item that you are creating a repair record
for.
b. From the Maintenance Record drop down menu for each item, select the maintenance
record that this repair should be associated with.
c. Click Save.
The maintenance records are selected.
9. In the Date text box, enter the date of this repair.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
10. In the Cost text box, type the cost of the repair.
11. In the Short Description and/or Long Description text box, type any additional details about the
repair.
12. In the Repaired By text box, type the name of the person who performed the repair.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 272
13. In the Staff Hours Spent text box, type the number of hours spent on this repair by your agency’s
staff.
14. In the Downtime Start Date text box, type the date that this item was first taken out of use for this
repair.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
15. In the Downtime End Date text box, type the date that this item was returned to service after this
repair.
OR
Use the Calendar icon
to select the date from a calendar.
OR
To record the current date, click the Today link.
16. In the Retest section, select whether this item will need to be retested after the repair.
17. Click Save.
The repair record is added and the Parts link appears.
18. OPTIONAL: To record parts that were used in this repair,
a. From the repair record, click the Parts tab.
The Parts page appears.
b. Click the Add a Part button.
The Add a Part page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 273
c. In the Name text box, type the name of the part.
d. From the Vendor drop down menu, select the name of the vendor from whom you bought
the part.
e. In the Cost text box, type the cost of the part.
f. In the Short Description and/or Long Description text boxes, type any additional details
about the part.
g. Click Save.
h. Repeat steps a–g for all needed parts.
NOTE: As you add parts, statistics will appear on the Parts page detailing the number
and value of parts needed for this repair.
9.32 Setting Up Product Categories
Administrators can set up categories to organize products from the Setup tab. These categories will then
be available for people who are entering new products. Categories can also define some of the options
that will be available for products created within the category.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
4. If necessary, from the left menu, under Manage Products, click Product Categories.
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Products header, click Manage
Products to expand the menu.
The Product Categories page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 274
5. Click Add a Product Category.
The Add a Product Category page appears.
6. In the Name text box, type a name for this category.
7. OPTIONAL: If this will be a sub-category for a category that has already been created, from the
Parent drop down menu, select the category that will be immediately above this one.
8. From the Stockable drop down menu, select if products within this category can be stored.
9. OPTIONAL: If this category should be a part of a special data category to capture custom
information, from the Special Data Category drop down menu, select the desired category.
10. In the Short Description and Long Description text boxes, type any descriptive information for this
category.
11. To add possible manufacturers for products in this category, in the Manufacturers section,
a. From the Available section, select the desired options.
HINT: You can select multiple options by pressing and holding the Ctrl key while
clicking each option.
b. Click the Add icon
.
c. Repeat steps a–b as needed until all desired manufacturers are added.
HINT: The manufacturers you select here will be available as options for
manufacturers when you create products within this category.
12. To add product attributes that should be included for products in this category, in the Product
Attributes section,
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 275
a. From the Available section, select the desired options.
HINT: You can select multiple options by pressing and holding the Ctrl key while
clicking each option.
b. Click the Add icon
.
c. Repeat steps a–b as needed until all desired attributes are added.
HINT: These product attributes will then appear as questions when new products are
created within this category.
13. To add custom questions that should be asked for products in this category, in the Custom
Questions section,
a. From the Available section, select the desired options.
HINT: You can select multiple options by pressing and holding the Ctrl key while
clicking each option.
b. Click the Add icon
.
c. Repeat steps a–b as needed until all desired questions are added.
HINT: These custom questions will then appear as questions when new products are
created within this category.
14. In the Active section, select whether this category should currently be active and available for
user, or inactive and saved for only reference.
15. When finished, click Save.
The product category is saved.
9.33 Adding a Manufacturer
You can record manufacturers when you create product records, but the manufacturer records must first
be set up in the Setup tab.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
4. If necessary, from the left menu, under Manage Products, click Manufacturers.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 276
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Products header, click Manage
Products to expand the menu.
5. Click Add a Manufacturer.
The Add a Manufacturer page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 277
6. In the Name text box, type the name of this manufacturer.
7. If needed, in the Duns Number and Naics Number text boxes, type the appropriate numbers for
this manufacturer.
8. In the Address text boxes, type the manufacturer’s address.
9. In the Postal Code text box, type the zip code for the manufacturer.
10. Click Update Now.
The city, county and state information is added to the record.
11. In the Contact Information section, type all known information about any contact at this
manufacturer.
12. In the Additional Information section, type any descriptive information about this manufacturer.
13. To also create a vendor record for this manufacturer, select the Automatically create a vendor
with the same details as this manufacturer checkbox.
HINT: This is most helpful if you buy merchandise directly from the manufacturer.
14. When finished, click Save.
The manufacturer record is added to the system.
9.34 Adding a Product Attribute
Product attributes allow you to collect custom information about specific categories of products. They
appear as questions with a drop down menu on the product record. You must create the product attribute
before you can apply it towards a category or product.
Product attributes are similar to custom questions, but when adding a product attribute the field must
have a drop down menu.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
4. If necessary, from the left menu, under Manage Products, click Product Attributes.
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Products header, click Manage
Products to expand the menu.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 278
5. Click Add a Product Attribute.
The Add a Product Attribute page appears.
6. In the Name text box, type the question.
7. In the Active section, select whether this attribute should currently be active and available in the
system for use, or inactive and saved for reference or later use.
8. To add a possible answer for the question that will be generated for the attribute, in the Product
Attribute Options section, in the Name text box, type the first answer.
9. Click Save.
A new line appears.
10. Repeat steps 8–9 until all desired answers are added.
11. To change the order of any of the possible options, in the Order text boxes, type the number
corresponding to the desired order.
12. Click Save.
9.35 Adding a Vendor
Each product and item record can be associated with vendors. This allows you to record which vendors
sell particular products and where an item was purchased. Before you can do this, however, you must set
up the vendor records.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 279
4. If necessary, from the left menu, under Manage Products, click Vendors.
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Products header, click Manage
Products to expand the menu.
5. Click Add a Vendor.
The Add a Vendor page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 280
6. In the Name text box, type the name of this vendor.
7. If needed, in the Duns Number and Naics Number text boxes, type the appropriate numbers for
this manufacturer.
8. In the Address text boxes, type the vendor’s address.
9. In the Postal Code text box, type the zip code for the vendor.
10. Click Update Now.
The city, county and state information is added to the record.
11. In the Contact Information section, type all known information about any contact at this vendor.
12. In the Additional Information section, type any descriptive information about this vendor.
13. To also create a manufacturer record for this manufacturer, select the Automatically create a
manufacturer with the same details as this vendor checkbox.
HINT: This is most helpful if you buy merchandise directly from the manufacturer.
14. When finished, click Save.
The vendor record is added to the system.
9.36 Adding Repair Statuses
When recording repairs for an item’s maintenance record, you can personalize the repair statuses that
are available. This allows you to track the progress of repairs.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
4. Under Manage Maintenance, click Repair Statuses.
The Repair Statuses page appears.
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Maintenance header, click Manage
Maintenance to expand the menu.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 281
5. Click Add a Repair Status.
The Maintenance Status Details page appears.
6. In the Name text box, type the name of the status.
HINT: This will be the text that you can select when assigning a status.
7. In the Show on Widget section, select whether repairs with this status should be included in the
Selected Maintenance Repair Statuses widget for the Inventory Dashboard and the Fire Bridge
Dashboard.
8. In the Description text box, type any additional information about this status.
9. Click Save.
The status is added.
9.37 Adding a Maintenance Status
You can assign a status to any maintenance record in your system, and your service can customize the
statuses that are available. This allows you to track the progress of maintenance on any item.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
4. Under Manage Maintenance, click Maintenance Statuses.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 282
The Maintenance Statuses page appears.
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Maintenance header, click Manage
Maintenance to expand the menu.
5. Click Add a Maintenance Status.
The Maintenance Status Details page appears.
6. In the Name text box, type the name of the status.
HINT: This will be the text that you can select when assigning a status.
7. In the Description text box, type any additional information about the status.
8. When finished, click Save.
The status is added and available for use.
9.38 Adding a Maintenance Category
Maintenance categories allow you to organize maintenance records, as well as to associate specific types
of maintenance with special data categories to collect information specific to that type of maintenance.
You can add as many maintenance categories as needed, although each maintenance category can be
associated with only one special data category.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 283
4. Under Manage Maintenance, click Maintenance Statuses.
The Maintenance Statuses page appears.
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Maintenance header, click Manage
Maintenance to expand the menu.
5. Click Add Maintenance Category.
The Maintenance Category Details page appears.
6. In the Name text box, type a name for the category.
7. In the Short Description and Long Description text boxes, type any additional descriptive
information about the category.
8. From the Special Data Category drop down menu, select the data category to be associated with
this maintenance category.
9. When finished, click Save.
The maintenance category is saved.
9.39 Adding Special Data Categories
Special data categories allow you to collect information that may be specific to a product or maintenance
category within that product or item record. This allows you to keep track of all the information you need,
without having extra fields on product records. For example, special data categories allow you to collect
fuel receipts or tire information about apparatuses, but will prevent them from being displayed on product
records for boots or desks.
Special data categories are set up with elements, which determine exactly what information is collected.
They are then assigned to product categories, which determines which products and items can collect the
information.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 284
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
4. From the left menu, under Manage Resources, click Special Data Categories.
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Resources header, click Manage
Resources to expand the menu.
5. Click Add a Special Data Category.
The Add a Special Data Category page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 285
6. In the Name text box, type the name for this data category.
7. In the Description text box, type any additional explanation of this category.
8. In the Details for Inventory Item Page section, from the Available scroll list, select the elements
that you would like to include for items that have this special data category.
HINTS:
The elements will determine what new information is collected for these items.
To select multiple items, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each desired element.
9. Click the Add icon
.
10. Repeat steps 8–9 until all desired elements are added for inventory items.
11. OPTIONAL: To reorder the selected elements, select the desired element and click the up and
down buttons until the elements are in the desired order.
12. In the Details for Maintenance Page section, from the Available scroll list, select the elements that
you would like to include for maintenance records that are associated with this special data
category.
HINTS:
The elements will determine what new information is collected for these items.
To select multiple items, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each desired element.
13. Click the Add icon
.
14. Repeat steps 12–13 until all desired elements are added.
15. OPTIONAL: To reorder the selected elements, select the desired element and click the up and
down buttons until the elements are in the desired order.
16. When finished, click Save.
The special data category is created and can be assigned to product categories for use.
9.40 Adding Custom Questions
Custom questions allow you to collect custom information about a certain category of products by placing
a question with a text box on the product record. You must create the custom questions before they can
be applied to a product or category. Custom questions are similar to product attributes, but allow you to
use either a drop down menu or a text field to collect the information.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
4. If necessary, from the left menu, under Manage Resources, click Custom Questions.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 286
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Resources header, click Manage
Resources to expand the menu.
5. Click Add a Custom Question.
The Add a Custom Question page appears.
6. In the Name text box, type the question.
7. In the Active section, select whether this question should currently be active and available in the
system for use, or inactive and saved for reference or later use.
8. OPTIONAL: To create a drop down menu with possible answers for this question,
a. In the Product Attribute Options section, in the Name text box, type the first answer.
b. Click Save.
A new line appears.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired answers are added.
d. To change the order of any of the possible options, in the Order text boxes, type the
number corresponding to the desired order.
9. Click Save.
9.41 Adding Document Types
All documents that are uploaded to the system can be classified with a document type to organize them.
You can set up these document types in the Setup section.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 287
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
4. Under Manage Resources, click Document Types.
The Document Types page appears.
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Resources header, click Manage
Resources to expand the menu.
5. Click Add a Document Type.
The Document Type Details page appears.
6. In the Name text box, type a name for this document type.
7. In the Description text box, type any additional information about this document type.
HINT: If you have multiple document types, you may want to enter extra details here to make
it easier for people to tell exactly what types of documents should be classified under this type.
8. To show an alert on a product or item that has a document of this type, in the Display Alert
section, click Save.
HINT: The alert will be displayed as an icon
The document type is created.
7/19/2013
in the header for this product or item.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 288
9.42 Adding Funding Sources
You can record the funding source used to purchase items once funding sources are set up in the Setup
section.
1. From the top left, click My Fire Department.
2. Under the Modules tab, click Inventory 2.0.
The Inventory module opens.
3. Select the Setup link.
The Setup tab appears.
4. Under Manage Resources, click Funding Sources.
The Funding Sources page appears.
HINT: If the sub-menu is not displayed under the Manage Resources header, click Manage
Resources to expand the menu.
5. Click Add a Funding Source.
The Add a Funding Source page appears.
6. In the Name text box, type a name for this funding source.
7. OPTIONAL: To record any account number with the record for this funding source, in the
Account Number text box, type the number.
8. In the Description text box, type any explanation or additional information about the source.
9. When finished, click Save.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 289
CHAPTER 10
WORKING WITH CHECKLISTS
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 290
10.1 Chapter Overview
The Checklist module allows you to create, complete and manage checklists for your agency.
Administrators can also create a question library, allowing you to save items that will appear on multiple
checklists for quick addition.
10.2 Viewing Checklists
Once an administrator has created instances of a checklist, they will be visible in the Checklist
Management section of the Checklist module. Administrators can view checklist instances at any time.
1. Under the Modules tab, select Checklist.
The Checklist Management page appears.
HINT: As an administrator, if you were previously working in the Setup section, to return to the
list of checklists, click Manage.
2. If needed, to locate the checklist to view,
a. From the drop down menus, select any criteria that the checklist should meet (e.g., which
station or vehicle it is assigned to).
As you select options, the page refreshes to display only checklists meeting your criteria.
b. In the mm/dd/yyyy text box, click and select the date for the checklist from the calendar.
As you select options, the page refreshes to display only checklists meeting your criteria.
c. To search for a checklist by name, type the name or part of the name in the Search text
box.
As you type, the page refreshes to display only checklists meeting your criteria.
3. To view the instances of each checklist, click the name of the checklist.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 291
The list of checklist instances appears.
HINT: Each instance is color coded based on its current status. Green instances have been
completed so that all required items are filled out. Orange instances have been partially
completed, but not all required items have been filled out. White instances have not yet been
updated.
4. To view the details of an instance, click that instance.
Additional details appear.
NOTE: Sections where all items have been completed may be collapsed. To expand a
specific section, click the name of the section. To expand all sections, from the right side of the
page, click Expand All.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 292
5. To view this instance for a different date,
a. Click within the Date text box and select the desired date.
b. Click Switch Checklist.
You are brought to the checklist for the selected date.
10.3 Setting Up Items for Checklists
It is most efficient to set up a library of items to be included on the checklist before creating a checklist.
1. Under the Modules tab, select Checklist.
The Checklist Management page appears.
2. Click Setup.
The Checklists page appears.
3. From the left menu, select Items.
The Items page appears.
4. From the right side of the page, click New Item.
The New/Edit Item page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type the item for the checklist.
6. From the Type drop down menu, select the type of answer that users completing this checklist
should be able to use (e.g., Yes/No, a date field).
7. In the Description text box, type any additional information to appear when users hover over a
More Information icon for the item.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 293
8. To provide a text box on the checklist that allows users to fill in additional comments and
information, select the Comments checkbox.
9. To require users to enter a response for this item when it is included in a checklist, select the
Required checkbox.
10. When finished, to save this item, click Save.
OR
To save this item and immediately open the form to create another new item, click Save and Add
New.
10.4 Setting Up Categories for Checklists
All checklists will have an instance created for each time they need to be filled out. Instances can be
associated with a vehicle or station that they need to be filled out for, or you can create other categories
to associate your checklist instances with. Categories allow you the flexibility to assign a checklist
instance to anything that it might need to be filled out for.
When you are setting up categories, you can set up individual members for each category, which you will
assign instances to. For example, you might set up an Administrative category, and then be able to
assign checklist instances to the category members of Bathroom, Kitchen and Sleeping Quarters.
Adding a New Category
You can set up a new category for checklists whenever needed.
1. Under the Modules tab, select Checklist.
The Checklist Management page appears.
2. Click Setup.
The Checklists page appears.
3. From the left side of the page, click Categories.
A list of existing categories appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 294
4. From the right side of the page, click New Category.
The Properties page appears.
5. In the Name text box, type the name of the category.
6. To add category members (i.e., the items that checklist instances can be assigned to),
a. In the blank Category Members text box, type the name of the first category
member.
b. Click Add Category Member.
The member is added and the Category Members text box becomes blank.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired category members are added.
7. When finished, click Save.
The category is set up.
Adding Category Members
You can add additional members to a category at any time.
1. Under the Modules tab, select Checklist.
The Checklist Management page appears.
2. Click Setup.
The Checklists page appears.
3. From the left side of the page, click Categories.
A list of existing categories appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 295
a. For the category you want to add a new member to, click the View and Edit icon
The Properties page for the category appears.
.
4. To add category members (i.e., the items that checklist instances can be assigned to),
a. In the blank Category Members text box, type the name of the first category member.
b. Click Add Category Member.
The member is added and the Category Members text box becomes blank.
c. Repeat steps a–b until all desired category members are added.
5. When finished, click Save.
The additional category member(s) are set up.
10.5 Setting Up a New Checklist
You can create a new checklist at any time in the Checklist module. Each checklist can have multiple
instances (e.g., you could create a checklist for Required On Board Equipment, and then create a
copy/instance to be completed for each vehicle, each day). Having multiple instances allows you to create
one checklist and re-use it many times.
1. Under the Modules tab, select Checklist.
The Checklist Management page appears.
2. Click Setup.
The Checklists page appears.
3. From the right side of the page, click New Checklist.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 296
The Properties page appears.
4. In the Name text box, type the name of the checklist.
5. To send a notification when this checklist is available,
a. OPTIONAL: In the Search text box, begin typing the name of the person who should
receive this notification.
The names listed in the Available scroll list refresh so that only names matching your
entry appear.
b. From the Available scroll list, select the name(s) of the person to notify.
HINT: To select multiple names, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each
desired name.
c.
Click Add
.
The name is moved to the Selected scroll list.
d. Repeat steps a–c until all desired people to receive notifications are included in the
Selected scroll list.
e. To send an email to the email addresses included in each selected person’s profile in
addition to an inbox message, select the Send an email in addition to the inbox, if
available checkbox.
6. OPTIONAL: To create a new, blank instance of the checklist that is not assigned to a specific
vehicle or station, select the Create a blank instance of this checklist without station or vehicle
selections checkbox.
7. To create a new instance of this checklist now,
HINT: An instance of a checklist is a copy that is assigned to a specific station and vehicle.
You can create an instance for a checklist each time you want it to be filled out.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 297
a. Click Add Instance.
The Instance Manager window appears.
b. To associate this instance with both a station and a vehicle,
i.
Select the Station & Vehicle tab.
ii.
iii.
c.
7/19/2013
NOTE: This tab is generally selected by default when the Instance Manager
window opens.
From the Station scroll list, select the desired station.
From the Vehicle scroll list, select the desired vehicle.
The selected station and vehicle are added to the (Station – Vehicle)
combinations to add scroll list on the right.
To associate this instance with a station but not a vehicle,
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
i.
P a g e | 298
Select the Station tab.
The Station tab appears.
ii. From the Available scroll list, select the station you want to create an instance
for.
iii.
Click the Add icon
.
d. To associate this instance with a vehicle but not a station,
i.
Select the Vehicle tab.
The Vehicle tab appears.
ii.
7/19/2013
From the Available scroll list, select the vehicle you want to create this instance
for.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 299
iii.
Click the Add icon
.
e. To associate this instance with a different category,
i.
Select the Category tab.
The Category tab appears.
ii.
iii.
f.
OPTIONAL: To narrow down the categories that are available for you to select
from, from the Category Filter drop down menu, select the type of category you
want to see.
From the Available scroll list, select the category you want to create this instance
for.
iv.
Click the Add icon
Click Save.
The instance is added.
.
NOTE: You can only create one instance at a time. To create another instance,
repeat steps a–e.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 300
8. When finished adding instances, from the right side of the page, click Save.
The checklist is saved.
9. Click the Items on This Checklist tab.
The Items on This Checklist tab appears.
10. From the right side of the page, click Add items.
The Add Items… window appears.
11. From the Available scroll list, select the first item to add to the checklist.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
7/19/2013
Click the Add icon
.
Repeat steps 11–12 until all desired items have been added to the checklist.
When finished adding items, click Save.
Click the Properties tab.
From the right side of the page, click Save.
The items are added to the checklist.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 301
10.6 Updating a Checklist
If needed, you can make updates to the checklist including adding items or adding instances.
Adding an Instance
You can add a new instance of a checklist at any time.
1. Under the Modules tab, select Checklist.
The Checklist Management page appears.
2. Click Setup.
The Checklists page appears.
3. For the checklist to add an instance to, click the Edit icon
The Properties page for the checklist appears.
7/19/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 302
4. Click Add Instance.
The Instance Manager window appears.
5. To associate this instance with both a station and a vehicle,
a. Select the Station & Vehicle tab.
NOTE: This tab is generally selected by default when the Instance Manager
window opens.
b. From the Station scroll list, select the desired station.
c. From the Vehicle scroll list, select the desired vehicle.
The selected station and vehicle are added to the (Station – Vehicle)
combinations to add scroll list on the right.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 303
6. To associate this instance with a station but not a vehicle,
a. Select the Station tab.
The Station tab appears.
b. From the Available scroll list, select the station you want to create an instance
for.
c. Click the Add icon
.
7. To associate this instance with a vehicle but not a station,
a. Select the Vehicle tab.
The Vehicle tab appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 304
b. From the Available scroll list, select the vehicle you want to create this instance
for.
c. Click the Add icon
.
8. To associate this instance with a different category,
a. Select the Category tab.
The Category tab appears.
b. OPTIONAL: To narrow down the categories that are available for you to select
from, from the Category Filter drop down menu, select the type of category you
want to see.
c. From the Available scroll list, select the category you want to create this instance
for.
d. Click the Add icon
9. Click Save.
The instance is added.
.
NOTE: You can only create one instance at a time. To create another instance,
repeat steps 4–8.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 305
Updating the Items on a Checklist
You can update the items that are included on a checklist at any time. This will update the items
on all instances of this checklist.
1. Under the Modules tab, select Checklist.
The Checklist Management page appears.
2. Click Setup.
The Checklists page appears.
3. For the checklist to add an instance to, click the Edit icon
The Properties page for the checklist appears.
4. Select the Items on This Checklist tab.
The list of items appears.
7/19/2013
.
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 306
5. To add a new item to the checklist,
a. From the right side of the page, click Add items.
The Add Items… window appears.
b. From the Available scroll list, select the first item to add to the checklist.
c. Click the Add icon
.
6. To remove an item from the checklist,
a. Select the desired item(s).
HINT: Clicking an item once will select it; clicking it again will deselect it. You
can select multiple items simply by clicking on multiple items.
Additional options appear on the right side.
b. Click Delete Selected.
The item is removed.
7. To group items on the checklist together,
a. Select the desired items.
HINT: Clicking an item once will select it; clicking it again will deselect it. You
can select multiple items simply by clicking on multiple items.
b. From the right side of the page, click Group.
A new window appears.
c. In the text box, type a name for the group of items.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 307
d. Click Save.
The items are grouped.
8. To add an item to an existing group,
a. Select the desired item(s).
b. From the right side of the page, click Move To Group.
A list of groups appears.
c.
Select the group to move the item(s) to.
The items are moved
9. Click the Properties tab.
10. Click Save.
The checklist will update.
10.7 Filling Out a Checklist
Users can fill out checklists as needed from the Checklist module.
1. Under the Modules tab, select Checklist.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 308
The Checklist Management page appears.
HINT: As an administrator, if you were previously working in the Setup section, to return to the
list of checklists, click Manage.
2. If needed, to locate the checklist to fill out,
a. From the drop down menus, select any criteria that the checklist should meet (e.g., which
station or vehicle it is assigned to).
As you select options, the page refreshes to display only checklists meeting your criteria.
b. In the mm/dd/yyyy text box, click and select the date for the checklist from the calendar.
As you select options, the page refreshes to display only checklists meeting your criteria.
c. To search for a checklist by name, type the name or part of the name in the Search text
box.
As you type, the page refreshes to display only checklists meeting your criteria.
3. Click the name of the checklist you need to fill out.
A list of each instance of this checklist (restricted based on any criteria you selected in step 2)
appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 309
4. Click the checklist you need to fill out.
The checklist appears.
5. For each item, select or type the appropriate response.
HINTS:
For items with the Details icon next to them, hover your mouse over the icon to view additional
details.
For items with a check mark and an X, click the appropriate button.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 310
For items with a text box, enter a number.
For items with a date field, enter the date.
6. To enter one answer for all items in a section, click the appropriate option in the header of the
group.
HINT: This only works for items that have the same type of answer. If an item in the group
requires a numeric answer, clicking the Yes icon will have no effect on that answer.
7. To enter a comment for any specific item that allows comments,
a. Click the Comments icon.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 311
A text box appears for comments.
b. Type the comment information into the text box.
8. If desired, to enter additional comments in this checklist, type your content into the Checklist
Comments text box at the bottom of the page.
9. Before leaving the page, from the bottom of the page, click Save or Submit.
Your changes are saved.
NOTES:
It is important to save before switching checklists or moving elsewhere in the system to make
sure that your changes are saved.
If you have not completed all required items, your checklist will not be finished. You can save
your progress by agreeing to the confirmation dialog box, but the checklist will be marked with an
In Progress status.
If this checklist was not yet saved or not all required items were filled out, you will see the Save
button. If the checklist was saved previously and all required items were completed, you will see
the Submit button.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 312
CHAPTER 11
IMPORTING AND EXPORTING DATA
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 313
11.1 Chapter Overview
Data exchange is customized individually for each of ImageTrend’s clients. This chapter explains the
basic capabilities of the Data Exchange feature.
11.2 Introduction to Data Exchange
The Fire Bridge allows data exchange based on the client’s needs, which lets information be sent
between programs for various purposes. This can include sending information to a state or national
database, sending information to a billing company or importing a list of staff and their contact
information. Since the needed types of data exchange are customized for each client, clients should
contact ImageTrend for instructions on their particular settings or to set up additional exchanges.
ImageTrend’s EMS Fire Bridge provides a data exchanges to multiple formats and for multiple
integrations, including:
Agencies:
 GAPCR 2000
 NEMSIS
 NHTSA
 NISE
Billing Integration:
 Accordis
 Ortivus Amazon Sweet Soft
 Quadax
 Zoll RescueNet (also known as Sanitaas)
CAD Integration:
 TriTech
 Motorola PrinTrack
 Digitech
 FirstWatch Logistics
Trauma Integration:
 Collector
Vendors:
 CodeRed
 Firehouse Import Export
 Zoll Data Systems
 Sansio (Scanhealth)
Other Formats:
 ODBC
 Microsoft Access
 CSV
 Flat file formats
 XML
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 314
11.3 Running a NFIRS Export
You can use your Fire Bridge to export your runs for NFIRS at any time. This export will place all your run
information into a file that will be accepted for NFIRS.
1. From the top left, click Data Exchange.
HINT: If you have several modules available, the Data Exchange link may be included under
the More link at the upper left.
2. From the left menu, click NFIRS Data Exchange.
A sub-menu appears.
3. Select Export NFIRS Data File.
The NFIRS Search page appears.
4. Use the provided fields to search for the runs you want to export.
HINT: The Exported field allows you to specify whether you are searching for runs that have
been previously exported for NFIRS.
5. In the Transaction Type section, select the information you want to include in the export.
Include Department Export
This option will include any department-related information in the header of the export
file.
Include Personnel Export
This option will include all personnel information for the department in the header of
the export file.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 315
Include Apparatus Export
This option will include all vehicle/apparatus information for the department in the
header of the export file.
Include Non-NFIRS State Specific Data Points
This option will include any data points that are collected by the state in addition to
NFIRS. These will only be exported if they are documented within a NFIRS run and
contain data.
Include EMS Data Points
This option will include the EMS module data within an NFIRS run.
Include Incident Apparatus Data Points
This option will include the Apparatus module data within an NFIRS run.
6. Click Search.
A list of records meeting your criteria appears.
7. Select the checkbox(es) for each report to include.
HINT: To see all the reports that met your criteria, from the Display drop down menu in the
upper left, select All.
8. Click Export.
A confirmation screen appears.
9. Click Continue.
The export file is generated.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 316
10. In the Export File section, click on the name of the file.
The File Download dialog box appears.
11. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box appears.
12. Navigate to the desktop.
HINT: Be sure to save this file to the desktop; files saved elsewhere sometimes cause issues
when being sent to NFIRS.
13. Click Save.
The NFIRS file is saved on your computer and can be imported to the NFIRS site.
14. Log in to the NFIRS software using your username and password.
15. From the Tools menu, select Import/Export Tool.
The NFIRS Validation Tool window appears.
16. Ensure that the Import is selected.
17. Click Select Import File.
The Import File Selection window appears.
18. Navigate to and select the NFIRS file to import.
19. Click Open.
The file is selected.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 317
20. Click Accept.
The transfer is initiated. When it is finished, a status report is completed.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 318
CHAPTER 12
WORKING WITH REPORT WRITER
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 319
12.1 Chapter Overview
This chapter explains the capabilities of the Report Writer, the types of reports that can be created and
how to create and customize reports.
12.2 Summary of Report Writer
The Report Writer allows users to dynamically create, display, and save transactional (formerly called ad
hoc) report templates. This gives the user the power to find and display the data required without relying
on static reports that may not include current data needs. The Report Writer encompasses a single
reporting tool that gives the user complete control of data output and display.
You can choose from multiple ways to display your report, from familiar text-based reports to pie charts
and mapping. You can report on multiple fields within several categories and data sets, allowing you to
create exactly the report you want. Database search criteria can be selected based on each field allowing
users to define exactly what they need. User defined headers, sorting, and grouping give users the ability
to display search results using a number of options. Reports can be saved for later review or editing and
also as a PDF document and CSV file (which can be opened and manipulated in a spreadsheet program
such as Microsoft Excel).
In addition, standard reports and charts are available for quick report creation. All reports are listed in the
left menu of Report Writer, organized by category.
12.3 Types of Reports
Report Writer provides several different types of reports for differing needs. Each report listed in the left
menu will display an icon to indicate which type of report it is.
Transactional Reports
While some transactional reports have a default setup of fields to display in a particular order,
transactional reports can be entirely configured. Users can change which fields display,
define additional criteria for each of those fields (e.g., display only records within a certain
postal code) and change the order in which records appear. In addition, users can create
transactional reports completely on their own with no pre-defined fields or setup.
Standard Reports
Standard reports are pre-created with all fields and display options defined for the user.
Within the fields, users can define additional criteria (e.g., requesting information about a
particular unit or type of service). These reports provide fewer configuration options and allow
a ready-made report for common data requests.
12.4 Requesting Standard Reports and Charts
While several standard reports are available from the All Reports section, many additional reports can be
found in Report Writer. These reports have pre-defined fields, although users can further define the
criteria for each of those fields. For example, if the staff field is set to display, users can display data only
for a particular staff member.
1. From the top left, click Report Writer 2.0.
The Report Writer page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 320
HINT: You may need to click the More button in order to find the Report Writer 2.0 link.
2. If necessary, to expand a category of reports, in the All Reports section, click the category.
HINT: Categories have a folder icon to their left. Reports have an icon indicating the type of
report.
NOTE: Clicking the category once will expand it to show all reports. Clicking it again will hide
the reports under the category.
3. To begin a report creation, click the name of the desired report.
4. Using the provided fields, select any further defining criteria for each field.
NOTE: Depending on the permissions set for this report, you may be able to set more or
fewer options to further define the information in the report. These options will be available from
each of the links at the top of the page (e.g., Columns, Grouping) and will work in the same way
that these options work when creating a transactional report.
5. From the upper right, click Generate Report.
If filters have been selected, the Filter your results page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 321
NOTE: Depending on the report and your level of access to it, you may be brought directly to
the page of filters without needing to click the Generate Report link. In this case, the page may
look different than the image below.
6. From each of the filters, select the criteria that the results displayed should or should not match.
7. Click Generate.
OR
Click Continue.
The report appears.
12.5 Additional Standard Report Options
Standard reports allow users to print the report, export the report to a PDF or spreadsheet (.csv) file, or
add the report to a My Reports category for quick access.
Adding Favorite Reports
Report Writer provides a My Reports category that can be configured for each user. Users may
add reports to this category for easy access. Reports added to My Reports will also remain in
their original categories.
1. Open and view the desired standard report.
2. Click the Add to My Reports button.
OR
If the Add to My Reports button is not available,
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 322
a. Click the Actions tab and select Add to My Reports.
The Details page appears.
b. OPTIONAL: In the Name text box, type a new name for this saved report.
HINT: The new name will only appear on the report in your My Reports
section, and will not affect the standard report for any other user.
c. OPTIONAL: In the Description text box, type any additional information about
this report.
HINT: The new description will only appear on the report in your My Reports
section, and will not affect the standard report for any other user.
d. To add the report to the My Reports category, click Save.
The report appears in the My Reports section.
Printing Reports
You can print a report if necessary.
1. Open and view the desired standard report.
2. Click Print Report.
The Print window appears.
3. Select your printer.
4. Click OK.
12.6 Working with Transactional Reports
Creating a transactional report can be a simple or a detailed procedure, depending on the complexity of
the report you want to create. Before beginning a transactional report, you should begin by considering
each of the elements you will need to work with to create the report.
Data Set
Each report must belong to a data set, which is a category of fields. This will help with
organization and will determine the type of information contained within the report. Selecting
a data set will determine what fields are available for your use in this report.
Columns
Within a category, you can select pieces of information to be included in each column of the
report. These pieces of information are based on the fields filled out throughout the
application (e.g., the fields within a run report or a staff record). Each piece of information that
should be examined or used as a criterion should be included for the report.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 323
Display
On this page, users can set the display order of fields, select numeric fields to display
averages, totals (previously called sums), the minimum value, maximum value and total
number of records, determine the alignment of the field display and pre-define a date range
for date fields.
HINT: To change the order of a field, only change the field you want moved; Report Writer
will automatically update the order of the rest of the fields.
Grouping
If the records should be clustered according to a certain type of information (e.g., all run
reports by service), you will need to set up grouping rules. You have the option to group
multiple times (e.g., within each service, you could group all run reports by the incident type)
for further organization. Each group can be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g., if
all run reports are organized by service, the services can be sorted alphabetically).
Sorting
If the records should be sorted alphabetically or numerically, you can choose to sort the
records based on the results in each column (e.g., sorting staff alphabetically by last name).
When used with grouping, you can only sort fields that have not been grouped. If grouping is
also used, sorting will be applied after grouping. In this case, after all grouping has been
performed and each group has been sorted according to their criteria, the records within each
group will be sorted according to the criteria selected here.
Criteria and Filtering
Both criteria and filtering options are included in the Criteria tab. Criteria will allow you to
determine limits on the data that will be displayed every time this report is displayed. For
example, in a report that displayed all incidents for a certain service, criteria would be used to
dictate that only records where the Service field contained the desired service name should
be included.
Filters allow you to specify a new value for a criterion each time the report is run. For
example, you could use filters to specify the dates that the report examines, so that each time
the report is run, users can specify which dates they want to look at.
Criteria and filters are important for narrowing the number of results displayed. If your
organization has hundreds or thousands of records in the system, this is very important to
limit the length of the report and prevent the system from timing out when trying to retrieve a
large number of records.
Preferences and Formatting
If you want to create a report with a custom look, you can change the headers and footers, as
well as the colors for the text, each row, and the rows beginning each group of data. These
options are available from the Actions tab, as well as many other report options.
Report Access
You can manage access to a report you create if desired. This can include saving the report,
setting who can view or edit it, scheduling the report to run at a specific interval or exporting
the report. These options are available from the Actions tab, as well as many other report
options.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 324
Step One: Selecting a Category
1. From the left menu, click Create a Report.
The Create a Report page appears.
2. In the Create a Transactional Report section, click the desired category.
The Columns page appears.
Step Two: Selecting Columns
Each column represents a piece of information that will be displayed on the report. For most
transactional reports, these pieces of information will be displayed in a column in a text-based
report.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 325
1. OPTIONAL: To locate a specific field, in the Search text box, begin typing the name of
the field.
As you type, the fields displayed in the Available scroll box will be narrowed down to
display only options matching your entry.
2. From the Available scroll box, select the fields to be displayed on the report.
HINTS:
To select multiple fields, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the name of each field.
To search for specific columns, type in the Search text box. After you have typed at least
three characters, fields matching your entry will appear in the Available scroll list.
3. Click Add
.
4. To change the order in which the columns appear, highlight each field to move and use
the Up and Down buttons.
5. When finished, click Continue.
Changing the Column View (Optional)
If desired, you can select the pieces of information to be displayed from a different list of
fields, sorted by the type of field. This view may be more familiar to you if you used the
Report Writer in previous versions of Resource Bridge.
1. From the right side of the screen, click Change View.
An alternate Columns view appears.
2. Select the checkbox(es) for each piece of information to display.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 326
3. When finished, click Continue.
The Display tab appears.
Step Three: Setting Display Options (Optional)
If you would like to change the order of the fields or the labels, alignment or format of the
information, you will need to set up display options.
1. To change the order of the fields, in the Order text boxes, type the numbers
corresponding to the order in which the fields should appear.
HINT: You need to change only the numbers for the fields you want moved; all other
fields will be updated automatically.
2. To change the header that will appear for this information on the report, in the Label text
boxes, type the text to appear.
3. To change the way that the data will be displayed (if possible), from the Format drop
down menus, select the desired format.
4. To change the alignment of the information within its column on the report, from the
Alignment drop down menus, select the desired alignment.
5. For certain numeric values, to display mathematical information (e.g., the total number of
records or the average value), select the desired checkbox(es).
Min.
This will display the minimum numeric value within the grouped results.
Max.
This will display the maximum numeric value within the grouped results.
Average
This will display the mean value of the numbers in all rows within the
grouping.
Count
This will count the total number of rows listed within the grouping.
Total
This is the Sum field that was in the previous Report Writer and will display
the sum of the numbers in all rows within the grouping.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 327
6. When all changes are made, click Continue.
The Grouping page appears.
Step Four: Setting Grouping Rules (Optional)
If you would like to place all records with similar values in a specific column together (e.g., all runs
from each service listed together), you will need to set grouping rules. In addition, all calculations
will be performed on groups. For instance, if you choose to display a minimum value or an
average from a column, the report will display a minimum value and average for each group.
1. OPTIONAL: To locate a specific field, in the Search text box, begin typing the name of
the field.
As you type, the fields displayed in the Available scroll box will be narrowed down to
display only options matching your entry.
2. To indicate which field to group by (e.g., if grouping all runs from each service, the
Service Name field), from the Available scroll box, select the field.
3. Click Add
.
4. If you would like to group by multiple fields, repeat steps 1–2 until all desired fields are
added.
5. OPTIONAL: If multiple fields are selected for grouping, select the fields and use the Up
and Down buttons to indicate which grouping should be done first.
HINT: Fields that are listed first will be the primary grouping rules. Each field following
will be grouped within the first field.
EXAMPLE: If the first field groups runs by zip code, the second field could group runs by
the service. Run reports would be clustered into a zip code group, inside of which they
would be listed by service.
6. To select whether the groups will be listed in ascending (e.g., 1–10 or a–z) order or
descending (e.g., 10–1 or z–a) order, select each group and click the Asc or Desc
buttons.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 328
7. When finished, click Continue.
The Sorting page appears.
Step Five: Setting Sorting Rules (Optional)
If you would like to place records in a particular order (e.g., a–z, 10–1) by the values in a certain
column, you may do so using sorting. When combined with grouping, sorting will be performed
after all data is grouped. In this case, after being placed in each of the assigned groups, data in
those groups will be sorted according to the rules set here.
1. OPTIONAL: To locate a specific field, in the Search text box, begin typing the name of
the field.
As you type, the fields displayed in the Available scroll box will be narrowed down to
display only options matching your entry.
2. To indicate the field with the values to sort by, select the desired field (e.g., to display
incidents in order based on incident number, select Incident Number).
3. Click Add
.
4. If you would like to sort by multiple fields, repeat steps 1–2 until all desired fields are
added.
5. OPTIONAL: If multiple fields are selected for sorting, select the fields and use the Up and
Down buttons to indicate which sorting should be done first.
HINT: Fields that are listed first will be the primary sorting rules. Each field following
will be sorted within the first field.
EXAMPLE: If the first field sorts by date, the second field could sort them by incident
number. In this case, all runs would be put in order based on the incident date. In cases
where multiple runs took place on a single date, they would then be placed in order
based on their incident number.
6. To select whether the sorting will be ascending (e.g., 1–10 or a–z) or descending (e.g.,
10–1 or z–a), select each field and click the Asc or Desc buttons.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 329
7. When finished, click Continue.
The Criteria tab appears.
Step Six: Setting Criteria and Filters (Optional)
Criteria will allow you to determine limits on the data that will be displayed every time this report is
displayed. For example, in a report that displayed only runs in Minnesota, criteria would be used
to dictate that only records where the State field contains Minnesota should be included.
Filters allow you to specify a new value for a criterion each time the report is run. For example,
you could use filters to specify a date range, so that each time the report is run, users can select
a date range for the runs.
Criteria and filters are important for narrowing the number of results displayed. If your
organization has hundreds or thousands of records in the system, this is very important to limit
the length of the report and prevent the system from timing out when trying to retrieve a large
number of records.
1. OPTIONAL: To group criteria together, use the parentheses in the second drop down
menu and the last drop down menu.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 330
EXAMPLE: To indicate that the records included in the report should only be for runs
within Minnesota with a destination of a hospital or medical clinic, you will need to group
the criteria for the destination types together. This indicates to the system that the run
must be from Minnesota and have a destination type of either hospital or medical clinic,
rather than saying that the run must either be from Minnesota and have a destination
type of a hospital, or have a destination type of a medical clinic.
2. From the Field drop down menu, select the column for which you are restricting the
values.
3. From the Operator drop down menu, select the way in which the field value must relate to
the value you are specifying (e.g., if the value should be equal to the one you are about
to specify, should not be blank, or should contain the value).
4. From the Value drop down menu, type or select the value for the criteria.
5. If necessary, close any parentheses by selecting a closed parenthesis from the drop
down menu.
WARNING: Make sure that there are no parentheses left open when you continue;
if there is an extra opening or closing parenthesis, the report will generate an error and
your criteria selections will be lost.
6. To add a new criterion, click Add
.
A new row appears.
7. OPTIONAL: To relate this criterion to a previous criterion, from the first drop down menu,
select whether both criteria must be met (And) or only one of them (Or).
NOTE: If both And and Or are used within one set of criteria, you will need to use the
parentheses in the second drop down menu to group criteria together.
8. To add any more criteria, repeat steps 2–7.
9. To add a filter (i.e., a field for which values can be specified before running the report
each time), from the Available scroll list in the Filters section, select the desired field(s).
HINTS:
To select multiple fields, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking each desired option.
To search for a specific field to filter by, type in the Search text box. After you have typed
at least three characters, fields matching your entry will be displayed.
10. Click Add
.
11. To change the order that the filters will be listed, select the filter to move and use the Up
and Down buttons.
12. When finished, click Generate Report.
The Filter Your Results page appears.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 331
Step Seven: Changing the Appearance of the Report (Optional)
If you want to create a report with a custom look, you can change the headers and footers, as
well as the colors for the text, each row, and the rows beginning each group of data.
1. From the Actions menu, select Preferences.
The Preferences page appears.
2. From the Select Header or Select Footer drop down menus, select the footer you would
like to display on the report.
OR
To create a new header or footer,
a. Click Add or Modify a Header or Add or Modify a Footer, as appropriate.
A Headers and Footers page appears.
b. In the Header Title text box, type a name for this header.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 332
c.
In the text box, enter any text or pictures to be included in the header or footer.
HINT: To enter any information that will automatically change when the report
is generated, click the desired option from the Merge Fields section on the right.
d. When finished, click Save.
3. In the Style Options section, select the colors that you would like to apply to the text, rows
or groups.
4. When finished, from the bottom of the page, click Save.
Step Eight: Viewing the Report
If any filters have been added, you will need to specify the values for the filters before proceeding.
1. If necessary, from the upper right, click Generate Report.
2. If any filters are available, to select additional restrictions on the data to be displayed,
select the desired criteria.
HINT: Be sure to select how many records you would like to display on each page of
this report. The default value will be 50 rows on each page.
3. When finished, click Generate.
The report appears.
Step Nine: Saving the Report (Optional)
You can save the report for your own use or for the use of others within your organization who
can access the Reports tab. This report will be listed in the left menu and can be run as many
times as desired after saving.
You will have the option to Save or Save As. Save will save over any report with the same title
with new changes, while Save As allows you to save the report under a different name,
preserving both versions of a report. If you are creating a new report from scratch, you should use
the Save option so that you can specify a name for the report.
1. Within the report you wish to save, click the Actions tab at the top of the screen.
2. Click Save to save the report with the current title.
OR
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 333
Click Save As to save the report under a different title.
3. If you select Save As, enter a new title for the report in the Name field.
HINT: If you are re-saving a report, the title will automatically be set to Copy of
(Report Name).
4. If desired, enter a new description.
5. Use the Category drop down menu to select where the report should be placed.
6. Use the radio buttons to select if the report is visible.
NOTE: If you select No, only you will be able to view the report.
7. In the Add to My Reports For section, from the Available text box, select any people who
should be able to view the report.
HINT: To locate specific people, type in the Search text box. After at least three
characters have been typed, names matching your entry will appear in the Available
scroll list.
8. Click Add.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 334
9. When finished, click Save.
The report is saved.
Step Ten: Deleting the Report (Optional)
While the report cannot be deleted completely from the system, you can mark it so no one,
including you, can access the report.
1. From the Reports toolbar at the top of the pane, select Properties.
2. In the Visible section, select No.
3. Make sure no users are in the Selected scroll list.
4. Click Save.
The report is no longer accessible.
Step Eleven: Assigning Permissions (Optional)
You can assign permissions to the report after saving it. This allows you to set who sees which
part of the report. Viewing permission can be restricted for parts or all of the report, depending on
your preferences.
1. From the Actions menu, select Permissions.
The Permissions page appears.
2. Use the checkboxes to select the appropriate permissions for each security group.
3. When finished, click Save.
The permissions are updated.
Step Twelve: Scheduling Reports (Optional)
You can schedule reports to automatically run for individuals at a certain time interval. The report
will then be emailed to a person as an attachment.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 335
1. From the Actions menu, select Schedule Report.
The Scheduling page appears.
2. Click Schedule Report.
The Scheduling page appears.
3. In the Recurring section, select how often this report will run.
4. In the Time section, select when the report will run.
HINT: If this is a large report, you will want to run it at a time when few people will be
using the system, so it will not slow down people who are working on other reports.
5. In the From section, type any dates that should restrict when this report will run (e.g., if
the report should only be run for a month or a year).
6. In the Subject section, type a subject line for the email that will be sent with the report.
7. In the Message text box, type the message that will appear in the body of the email with
the report.
8. In the Format section, select the format in which the report should be saved (e.g., PDF).
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 336
9. In the Recipients section, from the Available text box, select any people who should
receive this report on this time schedule.
10. Click Add.
11. In the Allow Unsubscribe section, select whether these recipients should be able to set
themselves to no longer receive this report.
12. When finished, click Save.
Step Thirteen: Exporting and Printing Reports (Optional)
If you would like to print or save a copy of a report with all the data that is displayed in the report
as you are viewing it, you can choose to either print the report or to export the report into a PDF
or spreadsheet file that you can save and refer to at any time.
1. Generate the report you would like to export or print.
2. From the top right corner of the report, click Export.
The Export Options page appears.
3. To export the report to any format, click the desired format.
HINT: Some file types have some limitations on the abilities to export. For example,
you cannot export to PDF if there are more than 1000 records in a report. Also, Microsoft
Word (Doc) files and HTML pages will only export the first page of the report.
4. For file exports, select whether you would like to open or save the resulting file.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 337
CHAPTER 13
GLOSSARY
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 338
Glossary
Active
Active records or features are currently available for use in the system.
Active Protocol
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. An active protocol is a set of steps that can be set up for any provider impression
or protocol, and will automatically bring up sections of the run form or power tools that are
needed to document those steps. Active protocols can be used on the Field Bridge and, if the
dynamic run form is used, on the Service Bridge.
Activity
An activity is a record of a task that must be done, such as changing the oil in a vehicle.
Add
1) You can add something to the system by creating a new record (e.g., a run report, staff
member, training course).
2) Add rights give you access to create new records in a specific section of the application.
Ad Hoc Report
An ad hoc report is a report that you can create from scratch, allowing you to set your own
criteria to display the exact information you need. Also called a transactional report.
Addendum
An addendum is an additional document that can be attached to a run form with more
information. Addendums can be added to a run form at any time, even if the run form is
locked.
Administrator
An administrator is a general term for a user with a high level of access to the system. Most
administrators will be able to configure the system to some degree and may also have
additional access to records within the system. Your organization may have several different
levels of administrators who have different levels of access to the system.
Agency Transferred To/From
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. An agency transferred to/from or a transferring agency is a record containing the
information for a single agency (e.g., nursing home, hospital) that a patient might be
transferred to or from. These records can be selected from a drop down menu on the run
form so that providers do not need to enter all the information for common agencies on every
run form.
Allocation
In the Inventory system, an allocation is a record of an item that is currently in the possession
of a specific staff member. Allocations can record the dates that a staff member has an item.
AMA Questions
AMA questions are additional questions that are displayed in the Against Medical Advice
signature panel for patients, which allow you to collect more detailed information.
Ascending
Ascending order sorts records from the top down (e.g., 1–10, a–z).
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 339
Association
1) An association in a training record is other training records that have been marked as
pertaining to this one (e.g., another session of the same course).
2) For users who need to access multiple services, an association links the staff profile that
user has in each service and allows that user to have only one username and password.
Attachment
An attachment is a file that is associated with a particular email or record. Whenever
someone opens the record or the email, they can then view or download the file.
Attendee
An attendee is an individual who will be present to take a course, as recorded in training
records.
Auto Call Number
An auto call number is a number that is automatically generated by the system for each new
run form, which uniquely identifies that run form for that particular call. The format of
automatic call numbers will be set up by the administrator for the system.
Auto Inspection Number
An auto inspection number is a number that is automatically generated by the system for
each new inspection record, which uniquely identifies the forms for that inspection. The
format of automatic inspection numbers will be set up by the administrator for the system.
Auto Narration
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. Auto narration is a feature that will complete the narrative on your run forms for
you based on the information already in the run form and your answers to questions that it
will ask once you choose to generate a narrative. These narratives can be generated to fit
one of several different formats and allow you to make changes after information has been
automatically generated.
Automatic Posting
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. Automatic posting is a feature that will prompt Field Bridge users to post their run
forms at a specific time. This feature is controlled by the system administrator, who can
determine whether the prompt appears, when it appears and what it says.
Average
An average, as discussed for reports, is a mathematical average for the numbers selected.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 340
Break
A break, as discussed in reports, is a space between sections of information.
Building Information Category
A building information category is a way to organize additional information about a building
that may not fit in other sections for a location profile. Some building information categories
will be preset with the system, but you have the opportunity to add more to fit your needs.
CAD integration
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A CAD integration refers to special setup and development done by ImageTrend
to allow your service to share information with an EKG monitor or computer aided dispatch
program. In order to send or receive information from outside monitors or software, CAD
integrations must be done to allow the systems to “talk” to each other.
Calendar
A calendar displays a small image of a calendar, allowing you to locate the dates you need
from a familiar calendar interface.
Call Hour Administration
Call hour administration is a section that allows administrators to determine whether calls will
be set to a specific time (e.g., one hour per call) or the exact time of a call for pay.
Census Tract
A census tract is a more specific area within a zip code that your organization can set up.
Census tracts can allow you to receive more accurate, targeted information about a particular
area.
Change
Change rights allow you to view and edit existing information or records in the selected
section, but not add or change any information.
Checklist
1) The Checklist module is a module in Fire Bridge that allows you to create and fill out
checklists for your agency.
2) A checklist is a form with a list of items that can be filled out multiple times when items
are “checked off.”
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 341
Checklist Category
A checklist category a custom group of things that you can assign checklist instances to. The
category will have members that a checklist instance is assigned to.
EXAMPLE: A category can be created called “Administrative.” The category members can
include specific category members “File Cabinet One” and “File Cabinet Two.” As category
members, each of those file cabinets will have a checklist instance assigned to it.
Child
Some records and features can be created as a sub-entry under a larger feature or record
(referred to as the parent).
CMS Billing Calculator
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. The CMS Billing Calculator automatically generates a suggested CMS billing rate.
Contact Group
A contact group is a way for you to organize any people who are in your system as a contact
(e.g., for a location or organization) according to any needs you might have. For instance,
you could create a contact group for landlords.
Content Rights
Content rights are set up within a user’s profile by the system administrator, and determine
which region and service that user can access.
Controlled Substance
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A controlled substance in the system is any medication that you define as a
controlled substance. When controlled substances are defined, they will appear in the
Controlled Substances signature panel on the EMS run form.
Correspondence
Correspondence refers to any letters or emails generated and/or sent by the system to any
people whose contact information is within the system.
Correspondence Template
Correspondence templates are patterns for letters and emails that can be customized and
sent out for individual pieces of correspondence. (This is also referred to as a merge
template.)
Custom Question
A custom question is a field on the run form or within the system (e.g., on the inspection form
or on a location profile) that can be created by your service to collect information that isn’t
currently being gathered.
Data Element
A data element is a single field or piece of information within the system; for example, the
incident number or the address field. Each data element also contains all possible answers
for fields with suggested answers (e.g., drop down menus or checkboxes). Data elements are
extremely complicated and should not be changed without consulting ImageTrend, to avoid
making changes that cannot be reversed.
Data Exchange
The data exchange is the section of the system that allows you to manage any files that you
import or export through the system.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 342
Data Set
1) A data set is a standard assemblage of information that should be collected. Many data
sets are created by agencies such as NEMSIS and NFIRS.
2) A data set is a category of information that you can create a transactional report from in
Report Writer.
Default
A default is something that will be used automatically unless a different value is selected. For
example, a default value in a run form will be filled in automatically in each run form, although
the user can manually change that value.
Delete
1) Deleting something removes a record from the system. Deleting records is not
recommended, as you will not be able to refer to that record again.
2) Delete rights allow a system user to view, edit, add and delete records within the section.
Descending
Descending order sorts records from the bottom up (e.g., 10–1 or z–a).
Destination
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A destination indicates the location or facility that an EMS patient was transported
to in the run form.
District
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A district is a division within a zip code that you can choose to set up to get more
targeted geographic information. Districts are also known as zones
Document Category
Document categories are organization categories that can be used to classify documents in
staff profiles.
Download
Downloading information brings selected information onto your system using an Internet
connection.
Drop down menu
A drop down menu is a field that allows you to pick one choice from several choices that will
be displayed. To view the choices, click the arrow on the menu
Drug Database
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A drug database is a separate database or application that can be accessed by
earlier versions of Rescue Bridge, which allows you to access a huge library of drugs that
might be used and/or recorded.
Dynamic Run Form (DRF)
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. The dynamic run form is a type of EMS run form template that provides additional
features for quick data entry.
Element details
The element details of a data element contain information about where this element is in the
database structure of the application, as well as a label and description of the element.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 343
Emergency Alert
An emergency alert is a message that will be distributed into the inboxes of all staff members
in selected services.
EMS Audit Events
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. EMS audit events are actions within an EMS report that cause the system to
record the user performing the action and/or request a reason from the user for that action.
EMS run report
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. An EMS run report is the report you need to fill out for any EMS calls.
Error log
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. The error log is a list of all errors any Field Bridges associated with your system
have generated. You can submit this list to your Service Bridge if necessary, and it allows
ImageTrend to view the exact errors you may have received in case you need support.
Export
Exporting data is sending it to a file that can be referred to and used outside of the system.
Exposure
An exposure is another location that was included in a fire call.
Favorite Destination
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A favorite destination is a record for destinations that you bring patients to
frequently; these destination will appear at the top of the list for easy selection.
Favorite Location
A favorite location is a record for frequently visited cities that will allow you to select the city,
county, state and postal code for that location with a single selection.
Favorite Report
A favorite report is a report that you have created in the Report Writer and saved to view
again from an easily accessible list of reports.
Field
A field is a space for a piece of information. Fields are often used for collecting information,
but also refer to a particular piece of information. Most fields are associated with a question to
let you know what information to enter.
Field Bridge
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. The Field Bridge is a field data collection program for EMS run reports which can
be connected to the system to gather data in the field without an Internet connection.
Filter
A filter is a field that allows you to view different information on a particular page or report
according to your current needs (e.g., a filter at the top of a page to select how many records
should appear on each page, or on the top of a report to indicate whether you want to view
records for active staff, inactive staff or all staff).
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 344
First EMS Unit Arriving
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. This option can record the first EMS unit that arrives on the scene of any incident
on EMS run forms.
Fire Inspections Client
The Fire Inspections Client is a software application that can be installed on a laptop to allow
fire inspectors to complete their inspection reports quickly in the field and without needing an
Internet connection.
Fire run report
A fire run report is the forms you will fill out to report on any fire incident. There may be
several different versions of the forms, but all are considered fire run reports.
Flag
A flag is an indicator you can add to messages in your inbox. You can use this to mark
important messages, messages you want to save or messages that you need to respond to.
Flagged messages will display a red flag icon to draw your attention.
Form
A form is a collection of questions and fields to gather information.
Group
1) A group is a collection of records with similar properties. For instance, you can create a
permission group for staff members who should have the same level of access to the system.
2) Grouping within a report is clustering information based on a particular criteria to create
visual “groups” within the report (e.g., grouping by zip code would gather together all records
for each zip code).
Hydrant ID
A hydrant ID is an optional way to identify the hydrants that are recorded within the system,
with a unique code.
ImageTrend
ImageTrend is the company that provides and supports the Fire Bridge.
Import
Importing data allows you to copy data from a properly formatted file into the system.
Inactive
Inactive records are not available for use in the system, although they are saved in the
system for reference.
Inbox
The inbox is a section within the system that allows you to send and receive messages, much
the same as email.
Incident Clearing
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. Incident clearing is an option that can be used if you are setting up Field Bridge
systems. It allows administrators to set the Field Bridge system up to automatically delete
incidents that have been posted after a certain number of days.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 345
Incident Report
An incident report is the paperwork you need to fill out to report on any incident you are
involved with. Incident reports are also referred to as run forms and run reports.
Incident List
The Incident List feature allows you to search, view and filter your incident forms to find the
ones you are looking for.
Inspection
An inspection is an organized examination of an occupant to check for fire hazards and fire
code violations.
Inspection Question
An inspection question is a custom question that your service can create to include on the
forms you fill out while doing an inspection. This allows you to collect information that may not
be included in the standard forms.
Instance
An instance in the Checklist module is a specific occurrence of a checklist to be completed;
for example, the On Board Equipment checklist to be filled out for AMB1 on May 1, 2013.
Interactive Physical Assessment
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. The interactive physical assessment is a graphical, Flash-based tool that allows
you to record medical, injury and burn assessments on the image of a person.
Invisible
Invisible rights prevent system users from seeing or working with the section in any way.
Item
1) In the Inventory system, an item is an individual object that you are tracking.
EXAMPLE: The Panasonic Toughbook-19 or ASUS Eee Slae EP121 would be a
product, while each individual computer or tablet would be an item.
2) In the Checklist module an item is an individual question that a user answers;
EXAMPLES:
An item may ask the user to record the mileage for the vehicle that instance is assigned
to,
A checklist item may ask the user if there five flashlights in a vehicle and give them a
yes/no option.
JFSI walk-in referral
JFSI (juvenile fire setter and incident) walk-in referral information gathers information about
juveniles who are likely to start fires later in life. This is part of an optional add-on module for
the Fire Bridge.
Layout Editor
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. The Layout Editor is the tool that can be used to create and edit EMS dynamic run
forms, as well as to set up provider actions and give access to specific dynamic run forms.
Leave of Absence Reason
Reasons, if they are set up for your service, can document the purpose behind leaves of
absence that are recorded in staff member profiles.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 346
Level
The level of a provider is based on their training level, which should be stored with the staff
member’s profile.
Location
A location in the system is a single site or building. Buildings may contain a single or multiple
occupants. Location records keep track of building information, pre plan information and other
building-related information such as maps or nearby hydrants.
Location Group
A location group is a collection of locations that you can use to help you organize and find
locations that are similar in some way. For instance, you could create a location group for
health care facilities or locations storing hazardous materials.
Location Question
A location question is a custom question that your service can create for location profiles to
collect any information that is not currently being recorded about locations.
Locked
Locked run forms cannot be edited.
Login
1) Your login information is your username and password, which are used to access the
system.
2) To log in to the system is to enter your credentials (username and password) so you can
access the system.
Logout
Logging out of the system is closing the system so that no unauthorized user will have
access to the information within the system.
Lookup icon
The Lookup button brings up a scrollable list of the possible options, preventing you from
needing to remember information such as codes.
Merge Field
A merge field is a short amount of text included within brackets, which signals to the system
that it needs to fill in the information for those fields from a particular record (e.g., a staff
member’s first or last name).
Merge Template
Merge templates are patterns for correspondence that can be customized and sent out for
individual pieces of correspondence. (This is also referred to as a correspondence template.)
Message Type
A message type is a category that can be assigned to messages sent within the inbox, to
help with organization.
Modal Window
A window that pops up on the screen when an option is clicked. The screen behind it will be
greyed out until the window is closed.
Mutual Aid Department
A mutual aid department is a record for any other agency or department that provides
assistance with an incident.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 347
NFIRS
NFIRS is the National Fire Incident Reporting System. This agency mandates the standards
for collecting information about fire incidents.
No fires reporting
No fires reporting is reporting a period during which there were no fires.
Non fire related incidents
Non fire-related incidents are the number of incidents you have been involved in that have
not been fire related.
Now button
The Now button will automatically enter the current time into the corresponding field.
Occupancy Question
An occupancy question is a custom question that your service can create for occupant
profiles to collect any information that is not currently being recorded about occupants.
Occupant
An occupant is a tenant of a location, including businesses and/or individuals. Occupant
records keep track of occupant information (e.g., organization and occupancy dates),
contacts, inspections and maintenance.
Occupant Group
An occupant group is a collection of occupants that you can use to help you organize and find
occupants that are similar in some way (e.g., all clothing stores or occupants with recent
violations).
On-site Materials
On-site materials is a section of a location record that allows you to keep track of all
potentially hazardous materials or materials that should be noted in case of a fire.
Order
The order of a record is its position within the list of records for that section (e.g., first,
second). Order should always be recorded as a number.
Organization
An organization is a record for a single entity that may occupy or control several locations
(e.g., a landlord with several properties or a university with multiple buildings).
Other Responding Units
Other responding units are records for other units that might assist with a call, such as EMS
agencies, police departments or utility companies.
Owner
Owner rights give the user full access to that section and all records within the section.
Panel
A panel within a run form is a section containing several fields, within a single tab. Panels will
have a header with the name of the panel at the top of the section.
Password
A password is a short collection of letters and/or numbers that, in combination with your
username, identifies you to the system. Your password should be kept secret.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 348
Permission Group
Permission groups, also referred to as security groups, are groups that users can be
assigned to that define their level of access to the system. Permission groups control access
to each major section of the system.
Permissions
Permissions are controls on how much access to the system a particular group has.
Plus one codes
Plus one codes allow you to add an additional digit to an NFIRS code to enter more specific
information (e.g., 111-1 could be a building fire in a factory).
Populate
Populating a field is automatically filling information in according to data that is elsewhere in
the system or the run form.
Post
Posting is sending the data from your inspections to the Fire Bridge that your Inspections
client application is connected to. You must post in order for your agency to be able to access
your inspections.
Power Tool
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A power tool is a pop up page that allows you to quickly enter common information
regarding a patient, such as vitals or IV information. Power tools provide larger buttons and
fields with common information more easily accessible, allowing you to quickly enter
information that can then be saved in the run form. When finished with a power tool, you will
be returned to the page you were previously working with.
Pre-Plan Info
Pre-plan info in the Fire Bridge is a detailed plan and hazard information in case of a fire at a
particular location.
Primary Role of Unit
The primary role of unit is a setting that will assign the role of a particular vehicle or unit to its
most common role by default.
Product
In the Inventory system, a product is a specific commodity. Any product allows you to have
multiple items, which will all be the same. See also items.
EXAMPLE: The Panasonic Toughbook-19 or ASUS Eee Slae EP121 would be a product,
while each individual computer or tablet would be an item.
Product Attribute
In the Inventory system, a product attribute is a type of custom question that allows you to
collect additional information about products. A product attribute will display a drop down
menu with the possible values that can be applied to a specific product. Product attributes are
made available for specific products by being associated with product categories, which are
then associated with products.
Product Category
In the Inventory system, a product category is an organizational tool that can be used to
classify products and control what options are available for those products (such as special
data categories or product attributes).
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 349
Provider Action
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A provider action is a group of procedure and vitals fields that allow you to quickly
document information for a specific situation or action.
QA/QI Note
A QA/QI note is a message related to quality assurance, which can be attached to a run form.
Quick Launch Links
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. Quick launch links are used in the Field Bridge and provide a way to add links to
the toolbar, allowing Field Bridge users to quickly navigate to a common program or website.
Range
A range is a series of records in a line.
Rapid Entry Listbox
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A rapid entry listbox is a type of field that appears on the dynamic run form that
allows you to click within the field to bring up a list of options, type to narrow down the options
for quick selection or open the Lookup window for a complete list of possible options.
Read
Read rights allow a user to view information in a section, but not edit, add or delete
information.
Repeat Patient
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A repeat patient is an EMS patient who is frequently involved with calls; a repeat
patient record can keep track of some of that patient’s information (e.g., address, medical
history, etc.) so that it does not need to be entered for every call.
Report Writer
The Report Writer is a section of the system that allows you to view and create new reports
based on the information within the system.
Rescue Bridge
The Rescue Bridge is a Web-based data collection and analysis system for fire and EMS
data.
Role
A staff member’s role refers to the role he plays on a call.
Rule Error Message
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. The rule error message is the text that will appear to notify a user of why points
were taken off if a validation rule is not met.
Run
A run is any call or incident you go on, or the report you fill out for that incident.
Run form
A run form is the report you will fill out for each call. This is also known as a run report,
incident report or run.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 350
Run Form Field Default
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A run form field default is the value that is automatically entered into a field on a
run form. This can be set up for templates that will be used in the Field Bridge or any dynamic
run form.
Run form template
A run form template is one particular layout for the run report’s form. Using templates allows
you to work with forms that are tailored to your service or the type of call. For instance, there
may be a cardiac arrest call template that gives you the forms for cardiac arrest calls, while
the standard form does not include that information.
Run History
Run history is a section where all previous run reports that have been completed are
accessed.
Run Locking
Run locking is a feature that automatically prevents run forms from being edited after a
certain number of days.
Run report
A run report is the paperwork that you fill out for reporting your incidents. A run report is also
referred to as an incident report, run form and run.
Scheduled Exports
A scheduled export is a system feature that will automatically export a file with set information
at a particular time.
Scheduler
The Scheduler is an optional, add-on module that allows you to track your shifts, inspections,
activities, trainings and other events in Fire Bridge.
Security Group
Security groups are groups that users can be assigned to that define their level of access to
the system. Security groups control access to each major section of the system.
Security Question
A security question is a question that will be asked when a user logs in to verify their identify,
as an extra security measure.
Service Defined Question
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A service defined question is a custom question that can be added to an EMS run
form to collect additional information that may not be collected in the existing run forms.
Session timeout
The session timeout is the amount of time that can pass when a user does not do anything
on the system before that user is logged out of the system. Session timeout is a security
feature, making it less likely that someone can access the data on the system if a staff
member forgets to log out.
Shift Setup
Shift setup is a feature that allows you to mark the staff members on the current shift, who will
then automatically be entered into new run forms with their default roles.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 351
Signature Consent Text
Signature consent text is the short amount of text explaining what is being agreed to before
requesting a signature.
Signature Validation
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. Signature validation is a feature that allows administrators to set up which
signatures will be required for run forms collected with the Field Bridge.
Site
In the Inventory system, a site is a specific location where items can be kept.
Sort Criteria
Sort criteria are settings for reports that determine how the records will be put into order,
based on the values within each field.
Special Data Category
In the Inventory system, a special data category is a collection of elements that can be
associated with product categories to collect additional custom information about products.
Special Study Question
A special study question is a custom question that can be included on fire incident reports to
gather additional information that is not already in the forms.
Staff Profile
A staff profile is a record for an individual staff member at your school. Staff profiles contain
demographic and certification information, as well as the permissions settings that control
that person’s ability to log in to the system and access data. Staff profiles can also contain
additional details, including emergency contact information, equipment allocations or lists of
completed training courses.
Standard Report
A standard report is a report that has been pre-created in the system and can be viewed from
the Report Writer at any time.
Standard Run Form
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. The standard run form is the traditional EMS run form, which does not require any
additional plugins to use.
Station
A station within the system is a record for any stations within your organization. When you
create station records, you can note which station was responsible for a particular incident.
Statistical Year
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A statistical year is the year for which you want to run statistics (e.g., if you want to
calculate statistics for the fiscal year, you can set up the year from July to July).
Status
A status is the condition of a particular record (e.g., active or inactive for users, in progress or
submitted for run forms).
Sum
Displaying a sum within a report will show the product of adding all values.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 352
Supplemental Form
A supplemental form is any additional form beyond the basic inspection form that is filled out
for an inspection.
Sync
Syncing, or synchronizing, is the process of passing all information set up on the Web-based
system to all Fire Inspections Client systems or other field data collection systems that are
connected with the Fire Bridge. This ensures that all data is up to date in the field systems.
Synchronize
Synchronizing, or syncing, is the process of passing all information set up on the Web-based
system to all Fire Inspections Client systems or other field data collection systems that are
connected with the Fire Bridge. This ensures that all data is up to date in the field systems.
System Administrator
The system administrator is the individual in charge of setting up and maintaining the entire
system.
Tab
A tab in a run form is an individual page containing related fields.
Tag
A tag is the name of an individual field that can be included on a run form, as set up in the
dynamic run form.
Template
A template is a pattern that can be used to create individual records; for instance, a run form
template can be used to create multiple run forms.
Timeout
The timeout is the amount of time that can pass when a user does not do anything on the
system before that user is logged out of the system. Session timeout is a security feature,
making it less likely that someone can access the data on the system if a staff member
forgets to log out.
Toolbar
A toolbar is a horizontal bar containing multiple links or buttons that can help you navigate
through the system or complete certain tasks.
Training Record
A training record is a record for a particular course that is being used to educate staff.
Topic (Training)
Topics are categories of information that can be assigned to individual trainings and
requirements that include these categories. Topics can then be associated with training levels
to indicate the required amount of training time for each topic for a specific license level.
Transferring Agency
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. A transferring agency is an organization or agency that is transferring EMS
patients either to or from their facility.
Unlocked
An unlocked run is editable.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 353
Upload
Uploading bringing a file into the system.
User
A user is a person who can log in to and use the system. In contrast to an administrator, a
user can only use the features of the system and not set up the system.
User Defined Exports
User defined exports is a section that set up which exports a user can have access to.
Username
A username is the name the system uses to identify you when you try to log in to the system.
Value
As used in this manual, a value is any text, number or selection that should be entered into a
field.
Validate
Validating a run is checking for any required fields that have not been completed in a run
form.
Validity
Validity is the percentage that the run form is complete, based on the rules set up for required
information.
Validity Compliance Documentation
This option will not be used in the Fire Bridge, as it is related to systems that manage EMS
run forms. Validity compliance documentation is a feature that can be set up for the Field
Bridge, allowing administrators to prompt users for reasons why required fields have not been
completed.
Validity Reason
A validity reason is an explanation of why a required field has not been completed in a run
form.
Validity Rule
A validity rule is a setting created by the system administrator, which determines when a field
is required and how many point should be deducted from the validity score if the field is not
completed.
Violation Letter Template
A violation letter template is a pattern that can be used to create letters informing occupants
of any violations that are found during their inspection. These can be accessed from the Fire
Inspections Client.
Web-based system
Web-based systems are applications that must be accessed over the Internet. In this manual,
the most common Web-based systems that will be referenced are Rescue Bridge, Service
Bridge and State Bridge.
Widget
A widget is an on-screen tool that can be displayed on the home page of the Field Bridge to
give you quick access to information.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 354
XML
XML is a type of file creating using the XML markup language. Rescue Bridge uses XML files
for importing and exporting information, as well as for determining how to create PDF files.
XSLT
A stylesheet used to create PDF versions of forms.
Zone
A zone is a division within a zip code that you can choose to set up to get more targeted
geographic information. Zones are also known as districts.
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 355
CHAPTER 14
HELP AND SUPPORT
7/19/2013
www.imagetrend.com
FIRE BRIDGE V.5.8: SERVICE ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
P a g e | 356
Help and Support
Before Contacting ImageTrend
Please have the following information accessible when calling ImageTrend:





A description of your computer system.
The name of your operating system and service pack version (if applicable).
A description of what happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred.
The exact wording of any error messages you see.
Your company name and contact information.
Contacting ImageTrend
If you are unable to find the information needed to use Fire Bridge effectively, please consult
ImageTrend in any of the following ways:






Phone
EDS Support Phone
Toll-Free
Fax
Web
Email
(952) 469.1589
(888) 730-3255
(888) 469.7789
(952) 985.5671
http://support.imagetrend.com
[email protected]
ImageTrend support services are available:
Monday – Friday
8:30 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. central time
Technical Support
For 24-hour technical support, ImageTrend provides online assistance through their website and
email services:


7/19/2013
Web
Email
http://support.imagetrend.com
[email protected]
www.imagetrend.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement